JP2017159184A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To reduce disadvantage of a player caused by the player forgetting to execute return processing of a card or coins with respect to a game medium dispensing unit (a card reading unit).SOLUTION: In a state where an external device reads negotiable value information stored in a storage medium, a prescribed external control signal output from the external device is received by external receiving means. The external control signal is extracted by external signal extraction means. Whether or not the external device is currently reading the negotiable value information of the recording medium is discriminated by external discrimination means. On the condition that the external discrimination means discriminates that the external device is currently reading the negotiable value information of the recording medium, a game machine notifies the player to execute storage medium return processing or cancellation processing of canceling the reading of the negotiable value information. When the operation is done, a game state is changed into a specific notification mode. This configuration can thus prevent the player from forgetting to execute the return processing or the cancellation processing.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  A conventional gaming machine has a lending unit (card reading unit) for lending a gaming medium to a gaming machine using a medium such as a card or a coin in order to lend gaming media such as a gaming ball. The one to be attached to was proposed.

JP-A-11-221336

  However, in such a gaming machine, the gaming machine only performs control for paying out the game medium in response to a command from the lending unit (card reading unit), and the gaming machine does not control the lending unit. Therefore, as a gaming machine, it was not possible to determine whether a card, a coin, or the like was inserted in the lending unit. For this reason, in such a gaming machine, it is impossible to control the player to forget to remove a card or coin, and the player forgets to remove the card or coin, resulting in theft or loss. there were.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and a player who forgets to return a card or coin to a rental unit (card reading unit) for a game medium. The object is to provide a gaming machine that reduces the disadvantages of the game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 reads out the valuable information stored in the storage medium by an external device provided outside the gaming machine, and corresponds to the read valuable information. A payout means for paying out the game medium in accordance with a loan request signal for requesting the game machine to lend, and when the external device has read the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, External reception means for receiving a predetermined external control signal to be output, and based on the external signal extraction means for extracting the external control signal and the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extraction means, External discrimination means for discriminating whether or not the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium, operation means having an operation unit operable by the player, and the operation means are operated. Based on the above, a return signal for executing a return process for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player or a release process for releasing the reading of the valuable information of the storage medium is sent to the external device. The operation signal output means for outputting, the operation determination means for determining whether or not the operation means has been operated, and the external determination means determine that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. A notification means for notifying the player of the operation means to operate the operation means, and the operation determination means when the notification means is informed by the notification means. Based on the determination that the operation means has been operated by the notification, the notification means switches the notification means to a specific notification mode different from the operation notification mode. A replacement unit, and has a.

  A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, further comprising return signal extraction means for extracting a return signal that is output based on an operation of the operation unit. Based on the extracted return signal extracted by the return signal extracting means, it is determined whether the operating means has been operated by the player.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, based on the external control signal received by the receiving means, the balance information indicated by the valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device. The external determination unit is configured to be able to determine balance information based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external extraction unit, and the operation determination unit is configured to display the external determination unit. When it is determined that the balance information has gone without passing through the predetermined minimum balance, it is determined that the operation means has been operated.

  According to a fourth aspect of the present invention, the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects of the present invention includes: Display control means for displaying identification information that can identify the determination result on the display means that is one of the notification means, and a dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed by the display control means for determining whether the determination information is correct or not. Dynamic display mode determination means for determining based on the determination result, privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when identification information indicating winning is displayed on the display means, and the dynamic display The mode determining means determines that the operation result is based on whether the result of the determination is successful and the external determination means determines that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. When a return dynamic display mode that is a dynamic display mode including an operation notification mode for notifying a player to operate the means is determined, and the notification switching unit displays the operation notification mode In addition, based on the fact that the operation means is determined to have been operated by the operation determination means, the display mode is switched to display the identification information indicating the hit.

  The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the determination unit determines whether or not the game is correct based on the establishment of the determination result. A bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the display control means for displaying the identification information that can identify the determination result on the display means that is one of the notification means and the identification information that indicates the winning is displayed on the display means. The bonus game execution means for executing the game, and when the success / failure determination condition is satisfied, until the start condition for displaying the identification information of the failure determination corresponding to the satisfied / failure determination condition is satisfied. A validity determination storage means for storing a condition, and a prior validity determination means for determining a validity determination result corresponding to the validity determination condition stored in the validity determination storage means before the start condition is satisfied. And the notification means determines that the operation means has been operated when the external determination means determines that the external device is in the state of reading the valuable information of the storage medium. The player is notified of the determination result of the prior win / fail determination means.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable information stored in the storage medium, and outputs the valuable information to the gaming machine based on the read valuable information. In accordance with a lending request signal for requesting lending of game media, the game media is paid out by the payout means. When the external device is in a state of reading valuable value information stored in the storage medium, a predetermined external control signal output to the gaming machine is received by the external receiving means. The external control signal is extracted by the external signal extraction means. Based on the extracted extracted external signal, the external determining means determines whether the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium.

  Also, a return process for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player based on the operation means having an operation unit that can be operated by the player, or reading of valuable information of the storage medium A return signal for executing a canceling process for canceling is output to the external device by the operation signal output means. Further, it is determined by the operation determination means whether or not the operation means has been operated.

  An operation notifying mode for notifying the player to operate the operating means is notified by the notifying means on the condition that the external determining means has determined that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. Is done. When the operation notification mode is notified by the notification unit, the notification switching unit switches to a specific notification mode different from the operation notification mode based on the determination that the operation unit is operated by the operation determination unit. It is switched by.

  Thus, when the player operates the operation means, a specific notification mode is notified, so that the player can easily determine that the operation means has been normally operated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the user from forgetting to confirm whether the external device has normally executed the return process or the release process by the specific notification mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the damage of the player due to theft of the storage medium and the valuable value information can be reduced.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the following effect is achieved. That is, a return signal output based on the operation of the operation unit is extracted by the return signal extraction unit. Based on the extracted return signal, the operation determining means determines whether the operating means has been operated by the player.

  Thereby, it can be recognized correctly whether the player operated the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player in a specific notification mode based on the timing when the operation means is operated. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be confirmed that the player has operated the operation means, and the processing of the external device can be confirmed without forgetting.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. That is, the balance information indicated by the valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device is displayed on the valuable display means based on the external control signal received by the receiving means. Based on the extracted external signal, the balance information is discriminated by the external discriminating means. When it is determined by the external determination means that the balance information has gone without passing through the predetermined minimum balance, the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated.

  Accordingly, it is possible to determine that the operation means has been operated by the player without detecting the operation of the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the gaming machine can be configured with a simpler configuration.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, the following effect is achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is executed by the success / failure determination means. Identification information that can identify the determination result is displayed on the display means, which is one of the notification means, by the display control means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed by the display control unit is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the determination result. When the identification information indicating the winning is displayed on the display means, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means.

  An operation for notifying the player to operate the operation means based on the determination result that the determination is successful and the external determination means determining that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. A return dynamic display mode that is a dynamic display mode including a notification mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. When the operation notification mode is displayed, the notification switching unit switches to the display mode for notifying the identification information indicating the win based on the determination that the operation unit is operated by the operation determination unit.

  Accordingly, since the identification information indicating the winning is displayed when the dynamic display mode of the identification information is operated on the operation means, it is possible to give the player enjoyment of operating the operation means. Accordingly, the player can cause the player to play the game with the expectation that the return dynamic display mode is determined, so that the player can be prevented from forgetting to operate the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the damage caused by theft of the storage medium or misuse of valuable value information.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, the following effect is achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is executed by the success / failure determination means. Identification information that can identify the determination result of the determination unit is displayed on the display unit, which is one of the notification units, by the display control unit. When the identification information indicating the winning is displayed on the display means, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. When the determination condition is satisfied, the determination condition storage means stores the determination condition until the start condition for displaying the identification information of the determination corresponding to the determination condition is satisfied. . The prior determination result corresponding to the stored determination result is determined by the prior determination unit before the start condition is satisfied.

  When it is determined by the external determination means that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium, the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated, and the advance determination means The determination result is notified to the player by the notification means.

  Thereby, a privilege can be given to a player by operating an operation means, and the opportunity for a player to operate an operation means can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce that the player forgets to operate the operation means and suffers from theft of the storage medium or misuse of valuable value information.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the opening image at the time of the jackpot start of a display screen, (b) is the figure which showed the card return fluctuation | variation aspect displayed on a display screen. (A) is the figure which showed the display aspect of the password setting screen displayed on a display screen, (b) is the figure which showed the display aspect of the password input screen displayed on a display screen. (A) is the figure which showed the notification aspect of the card insertion displayed on a display screen, (b) is the figure which showed the notification aspect of the card balance displayed on a display screen. (A) is the figure which showed the balance display, (b) is the figure which showed the frame button of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the connection of the card | curd reading unit and pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the connection of the balance display and card reading unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the connection of the return button of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment, and a card reading unit. (A)-(d) is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the various counter values used with a pachinko machine. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of ROM of the main controller, (b) was the figure which showed the jackpot random number table, (c) showed the jackpot type table. It is a figure and (d) is the figure which showed the random number table per common symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the card | curd process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the customer waiting production process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding change process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the card effect control process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the card | curd alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the card | curd return effect process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the password input process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the password process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the break process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the structure at the time of locking the shutter member in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is typical about the structure at the time of releasing the shutter member in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure shown in. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the shutter input process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the shutter setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the shutter process which is one process of the shutter setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment.

  DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 (see FIG. 7B) is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. As shown in FIG. 7B, the frame button 22 is an enter button 22a, an upward button 22b that mainly designates an upward direction, a left button 22c that mainly designates a left direction, and mainly designates a downward direction. The down button 22d is mainly composed of a right button for designating the right direction.

  The determination button 22a is, for example, when performing an operation of selecting a setting button displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (determining with the input password) on a password setting screen (see FIG. 5A) described later. In addition, it is operated by the player. The up button 22b, for example, in the password setting screen, displays a selection image (the background color of the displayed number changes) indicating the selected number for one digit of the password selected by the cursor. Move to. On the other hand, the downward button 22d moves the selected image indicating the selected number downward. As will be described later, the password is composed of a 4-digit number, and the digit for selecting the number is determined by moving the cursor left and right by the right direction button 22c or the left direction button 22e. When the player operates the left direction button 22c, the cursor moves to the left digit. When the player operates the right button 22e, the cursor moves to the right digit. The up button 22b, the left button 22c, the down button 22d, and the right button 22e specify the direction to the player when, for example, the character displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is moved up, down, left, or right. It may be configured to be used as appropriate.

  In addition, a break button 500 is provided on the front side of the upper plate 17 so that the card inserted into the card return unit 300 cannot be returned when the player takes a break. The break button 500 will be described later, but if a password is not set by the player operating (pressing) the break button 500, a password setting screen for setting a password (FIG. 5A). Is displayed to inform the player to set a password. When the password is set, even if the return button 42 is pressed, the operation is set to an invalid state (invalidated). If a password has already been set (for example, when the break button 500 is pressed and a password is set), a password input screen (see FIG. 5B) is displayed and set. By inputting the password, the return button 42 can be set valid (validated).

  In the present embodiment, when the break button 500 is operated, the password is set to invalidate the return button 42. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the break button 500 is pressed, , Forcibly disable the return button 42, provide a break flag indicating that a break is in progress, set the break flag to on, and return to the pachinko machine 10 only when the break flag is on You may comprise so that the return switch which can validate the button 42 is provided in the position which a game store side can operate. With this configuration, if the player operates the break button 500, the player can immediately go to a break and the operation becomes easy.

  Further, when the break button 500 is operated, the ball lending button 43 may be invalidated, or the game ball may be prohibited from being fired. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent problems such as illegally lending a ball during a break or playing without permission by another person.

  In addition, the password is set by operating the break button 500, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the return button 42 may be immediately invalidated by operating the break button 500. In such a configuration, a break release button that can be operated by a store clerk of the game store is provided on the back side of the gaming machine, the inside of the front frame 14 or the like, and the store clerk is called to release it.

  When the break button 500 is operated to invalidate the return button 42, the return button 42 is invalidated until the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is initialized or a set password is input. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an upper limit time may be provided for the time when the return button 42 is invalidated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a problem that the password is accidentally set and the return button 42 remains invalid for a long time.

  Further, when the break button 500 is operated and the return button 42 is invalidated, a notification mode indicating that the return button 42 is invalidated (for example, the third symbol display device 81 indicates “Now resting! "!" May be displayed. Furthermore, you may comprise so that the time when the return button 42 is invalidated may be displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. By configuring in this way, the pachinko machine 10 can be easily informed to a store clerk or the like that the break button 500 is operated and the return button 42 is invalidated. Therefore, even if there is a pachinko machine 10 that has been left with the return button 42 disabled for a long time, the store clerk of the amusement shop can find it early and cancel the invalidation of the return button 42 Thus, the card inserted in the card reading unit 300 can be collected and managed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being played for a long time from being continuously played and causing damage to the game store. Also, a preset time is set in advance, and when the return button 42 is invalidated for the set time or longer, a notification is made that the return button 42 has been invalidated for the preset time or longer. It may be configured. By comprising in this way, the game store side can identify the pachinko machine 10 invalidated for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the return button 42 from being left invalidated.

  A human sensor 400 is provided on the front side of the upper plate 17. The human sensor 400 is a sensor for detecting a player who plays the pachinko machine 10 using infrared rays. The human sensor 400 is turned on when a player is detected, and is configured to output a signal to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. When the human sensor 400 is turned off and a card is inserted in the card reading unit 300, the characters “Card is in!” Are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and voice output is performed. A voice “card is inserted” is output from the device 226 (S1814 in FIG. 32).

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to return the card in a state where the card is inserted into the card reading unit 300. Although not shown, this notification mode is configured to be stopped (erased) when the break button 500 is operated.

  In the present embodiment, the card notification process is performed as soon as the human sensor 400 is turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the human sensor is turned off for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Then, it may be configured to notify after the elapse of time. With this configuration, even when the human sensor 400 is temporarily turned off by the player moving his / her body in front of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, swinging his / her body side to side), It is possible to prevent the notification from being executed, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, an insertion notification lamp 310 for notifying that a card has been inserted into a card reading unit 300 described later is provided on the left side of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front. The insertion notification lamp 310 is formed in a triangular shape, and is arranged with the apex of the triangle facing the direction of the card reading unit 300 so as to point to the card reading unit 300. The insertion notification lamp 300 is controlled to be lit when a prepaid dedicated card is inserted into the card reading unit 300. The insertion notification lamp 310 is composed of a red LED, and has a higher luminance than other light emitting means (LED).

  As described above, when the card is inserted into the card reading unit 300, the insertion notification lamp 310 is lit, so that the player can be prevented from forgetting that the card is being inserted into the card reading unit 300. . In addition, since the light is lit with higher brightness than other light emitting means, even when playing a game, the other light emitting means is lit, so that the insertion notification lamp 310 is not lit. You can prevent problems.

  In the present embodiment, the card reading unit 300 has been described as being limited to the left side of the pachinko machine 10. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the card reading unit 300 may be positioned on the left or right side. 310 is also provided on the right side of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front, and a changeover switch or the like is provided in the pachinko machine 10, so that the direction in which the card reading unit 300 is arranged is set in the pachinko machine 10 by the changeover switch and is turned on The lamp 310 may be set. Further, by providing a sensor or the like for detecting the card reading unit 300 on the side surface of the gaming machine, the direction of the card reading unit 300 on which the pachinko machine 10 is arranged can be automatically detected and set. Good. With this configuration, even if the card reading unit 300 is variously arranged, it is possible to accurately notify the player that the card has been inserted, and forget that the player has inserted the card. Can be prevented.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a balance display 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into the card reading unit 300 (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent according to the operation. Is called. Specifically, the balance display 41 is an area where the remaining amount information of the card is displayed, and a built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as a remaining amount information. The ball lending button 43 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card. . The return button 42 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card reading unit 300.

  The card reading unit 300 is for reading the balance amount data stored in the card, and a card insertion slot 306 for inserting a card having a valuable value similar to money at a substantially central portion in the vertical direction. Is arranged. A card usable lamp 301 is disposed above the card insertion slot 306 and above the card reading unit 300. The card usable lamp 301 can insert a card into the card insertion slot 306, for example. On the other hand, it is turned on when the card cannot be inserted into the card insertion slot 306. Therefore, the player can determine whether or not the card reading unit 300 is usable by visually recognizing the card available lamp 301.

  An amount setting button for setting a loan amount based on the balance amount data recorded on the card at a position between the card insertion slot 306 and the card usable lamp 301 and above the card reading unit 300 302 is arranged, and by pressing this amount setting button 302, the lending amount can be set to 100 yen, 200 yen, 300 yen or 500 yen. Normally, the loan amount is set to 500 yen, and the payout of the ball P corresponding to 100 yen (for example, 25 balls) is made five times (for example, 125 balls).

  A fraction display button 303 is arranged below the amount setting button 302. The fraction display button 303 is pressed when displaying the fraction on the balance display 41 when the balance amount stored in the card is less than the minimum loan amount (for example, 100 yen). .

  Below the fraction display button 303, a pair of upper and lower connection table direction display lamps 304 formed in a substantially triangular shape is disposed. The pair of connecting table direction indicator lamps 304 are for indicating the direction of arrangement (parallel arrangement) of the pachinko machine 10 to which the card reading unit 300 is connected, and one LED is built in each of them. ing. Therefore, for example, when the card reading unit 300 is connected to a pachinko machine (not shown) arranged on the left side, the upper LED is turned on. A card insertion-in-progress lamp 305 composed of one LED is disposed below the connection table direction indicator lamp 304. The card insertion-in-progress lamp 305 is provided when a card is inserted into the card insertion slot 306. On when the card is present, the light is turned off when the card is not inserted into the card insertion slot 306. The card usable lamp 301 and the connecting table direction indicator lamp 304 are turned on when the card reading unit 300 is turned on.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Handle sensor (touch sensor) 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of a sphere during a pressing operation, and a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 are detected by a change in electric resistance. And a variable resistor (not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the handle sensor (touch sensor) 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount. A ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes according to the operation amount, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. In a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the handle sensor (touch sensor) 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

  A lower part of the front surface of the lower dish 50 is provided with a ball removal button (ball removal lever) 52 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower dish 50 downward. The ball removal button (ball removal lever) 52 is always urged to the right, and the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is slid to the left against the urge. It opens and the sphere spontaneously drops and is discharged from its bottom opening. The operation of the ball removal button (ball removal lever) 52 is normally performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “a thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. .

  The ball removal button 52 is provided with a ball removal button sensor 52a (see FIG. 8) that detects whether a slide operation has been performed. The ball removal button sensor 52a is composed of a limit sensor. When the ball removal button 52 is operated and the bottom opening of the lower plate 50 is opened, the ball removal button 52 is turned on. It is configured. With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 can determine whether or not the ball removal button 52 has been operated by the player. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64, a special symbol (first design) is drawn, and when the ball passes the second entrance 67, a normal symbol (first 2 designs) will be drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, Is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). ) Is released, and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbol jackpot types: “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”. After the special gaming state is over, the added value after the jackpot is over, according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when the special symbol (the first symbol) is drawn, after the special symbol variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37 and a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is held is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display. It is shown by the device 37 and also in the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started. Note that a special winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special gaming state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special gaming state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls enter the first winning opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It becomes a state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for a ball to enter the first entrance 64, and as a result, a special symbol is easily drawn.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the fluctuation display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is the first symbol display device 37. And is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, there are two types of special jackpot types, “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”. In both cases of “big hit A” and “big hit B”, a special gaming state (15R big hit) with 15 rounds is set. After that, when the jackpot is A, the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases after the jackpot ends until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. Further, in the case of “big hit B”, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during special symbol change) from the end of the big hit until the next big hit.

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol high probability state (during special symbol change), in other words, a special gaming state (15R). It is the state of the game that is easy to shift to big hit. On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol”, which has a lower probability of jackpot than the probability variation state of a special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbol). The “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time-short state) means a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol short-time state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state”, which means that the normal symbol hit probability is a normal state, that is, a state where the hit probability is lower than that in the short-time period. Show.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power supply or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “special symbol low probability state”. Thereafter, when the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, if the jackpot type is “big jackpot B”, the process shifts to “a high probability state of the special symbol” and also shifts to the “short time state of the normal symbol”. After that, when the special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot type is “Big Jack A”, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the low probability state of the special symbol, and the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. Until it is done, it becomes a high probability state of a normal symbol.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is being executed or not. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or variation is not executed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (the first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is configured to be suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of suspensions is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, it corresponds to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an opening display mode for notifying the player of the start of the jackpot game when the jackpot game is started. Although details will be described later, when a jackpot game is started when a card is inserted in the card reading unit 300, it is inserted into the card reading unit 300 as shown in FIG. The characters “Please press the card return button!”, Which is a display mode that prompts the player to operate the return button 42, are displayed so that the player can eject the card and return it to the player.

  With this configuration, when a jackpot game is started, a large amount of game balls are paid out to the player, and therefore, there is no need for a lending ball for a while. It is possible to prevent the user from forgetting that the card is inserted and forgetting to return the card after the game is over. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the card has been forgotten to be returned or the card is stolen or lost. Further, when a lending ball is not required, it is possible to prevent the ball lending button 43 from being erroneously operated and unnecessarily reducing the card balance.

  The 3rd symbol (special symbol) displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is composed of 10 kinds of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”. The main symbol is composed of three columns of left, middle, and right. When the three symbols are stopped and displayed with the same number in the center, it indicates that the lottery result was a big hit. In the present embodiment, when the stop display is performed with even numbers of “0, 2, 4, 6, 8”, it is notified that the jackpot A has been won, and “1, 3, 5, 7 , 9 ”are arranged in odd numbers, the player is notified that the jackpot B has been won.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 37), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the second symbol hold lamp 84. The second symbol holding lamp 84 is composed of four LEDs. On the second symbol holding lamp 84, one LED is turned on for each holding ball, and the number of holding balls is notified in accordance with the number of lighting of the LED. That is, when one LED is lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84, it indicates that the number of held balls is one, and when four LEDs are lit, the number of held balls is four. Indicates that there is. Further, when the LED is not lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84, it indicates that the number of holding balls is 0, that is, there is no holding ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to four times, but three times. You may set below or 5 times (for example, 8 times). Further, not only the second symbol hold lamp 84 but also a hold display symbol (for example, “●”) may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to display the number of holds.

  Further, the LED of the second symbol holding lamp 84 is configured to be able to switch and display both blue and red. As will be described in detail later, it is normally lit in blue to inform the player of the number of holds, but is held by operating the return button 42 while the card is inserted in the card reading unit 300. If there is a lottery game that is a big win among the lottery games that are being held (the result of prefetching is that a big win is held), the LED corresponding to the hold changes from blue to red and is lit and displayed.

  By configuring in this way, by operating the return button 43, it is possible to obtain a gaming privilege (you can know the lottery result before the start of the variation of the third symbol), and always return the player to the return button 43 Can be conscious of operating (pressing). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the state in which the card remains in the card reading unit 300, and it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to return the card.

  In addition, the second symbol holding lamp 84 is changed from blue to red to notify the result of prefetching. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured to notify the user to insert the returned card once again. With this configuration, for example, when a special symbol is hit, a player with a feather opens and a player wins a special prize opening (V prize opening) provided in the prize opening. In the case of a pachinko machine 10 configured to receive a bonus game, a game ball is required when a special symbol is hit, so a game ball is prepared in preparation for the special symbol (rental of a ball) Can be operated). Therefore, a state advantageous to the player can be given by operating the return button 42.

  In the present embodiment, the game benefits obtained by operating the return button 43 are notified of the lottery result of the game being held before the start of the variable display of the third symbol. For example, a two-dimensional image of a two-dimensional code or the like (for example, a QR code (registered trademark)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the two-dimensional code is read by a mobile phone or the like. It may be a privilege that allows the character used in the above, the voice of the character, and the like to be obtained. Moreover, it is good also as a privilege which can obtain the information (for example, the number of jackpots and the balance of the day (difference ball)) of the pachinko machine 10 by operating the return button 43. By comprising in this way, the player can increase the opportunity which operates the return button 43, and can prevent the malfunction which forgets to return a card and returns home.

  FIG. 4B is a diagram showing a card return variation mode that is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the 3rd symbol starts to change and reach a reach state where the left and right main symbols stop at the same symbol, “Press the card return button!” Is a notification mode that prompts the player to operate the return button 42! "Is displayed. Thereafter, when the player operates the return button 42 within a predetermined period of time, the letters “big hit” are displayed in accordance with the timing, and “777”, which is the display mode of the third symbol indicating the big hit, is stopped and displayed. The

  With this configuration, if the player is in a state where a card is inserted into the card reading unit 300, the determination result of the lottery game is displayed at the timing when the return button 42 is operated. Thus, the player himself can have a feeling that the symbol that is a big hit has been stopped. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to return the card by operating the return button 42 with special expectations. Also, in the case of a variation mode that is a big hit, by determining and executing the card return variation mode, after that, there is no need to lend a ball for the time being, so that the player should withdraw the card Can be made.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, a password setting screen and an input screen for setting the invalidation / validation of the return button 42 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the details will be described later, but the special symbol (the third symbol) fluctuates for a predetermined time or more when the card is inserted in the card reading unit 300 and the password is not yet set. If the stopped state (a state where no game ball enters the first entrance 64) continues for 30 seconds or longer in this embodiment, the password setting screen shown in FIG. It is displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the password setting screen displays characters “Please set password” to inform the player that the password setting screen is displayed. Then, characters “1 to 5” for setting a 4-digit password are displayed for each digit below the character. A cursor indicating the selected digit is displayed in a triangular display form, and the digit on which the cursor is displayed on the left side indicates a digit from which a number can currently be selected. Then, the background color of the number indicated by the cursor is displayed in a color different from the other background colors (for example, the normal background color is blue, and when selected, a white background is displayed). By operating the frame button 22, the cursor moves up, down, left and right, and when the player specifies an arbitrary 4-digit password and operates the enter button 22a, the specified password is stored in the pachinko machine 10 ( Set).

  In FIG. 5B, when a password for invalidating the return button 42 has already been set, the special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time or more (in this embodiment, 5 seconds or more). Otherwise, it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The text “Please enter your password” is displayed to inform you that it is a password input screen, and the password input screen is displayed in the same way as the password setting screen.

  FIG. 6A is a diagram showing a card insertion notification display mode for notifying that a card is inserted in the card reading unit 300 displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This card insertion notification display mode is related to the state of the gaming machine (the state of whether or not a game is being performed) on the third symbol display device 81 at regular intervals when a card is inserted into the card reading unit 300. Displayed. In the present embodiment, the display is performed for 5 seconds every 30 seconds.

  FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a card balance display mode for notifying the player of the card balance displayed after the card insertion notification display mode is displayed. The amount information is displayed based on the card balance. This card balance display mode is displayed for 5 seconds after the card insertion notification display mode shown in FIG. Then, after 30 seconds, the card insertion notification display mode is displayed and then displayed again. That is, the card balance display mode is also displayed with a 30-second cycle. Further, when the balance display mode is a predetermined amount or more (in this embodiment, 3000 yen or more), the display mode normally displayed in blue characters is displayed in red characters.

  By configuring in this way, only when the amount is more than a certain amount, it is displayed in a conspicuous character color, so that the player can be made aware that a card with a high balance remaining is inserted. Therefore, the remaining balance can be easily known. Further, since the balance display is not always performed in a conspicuous color, it is possible to prevent the balance display from interfering with the game.

  In this embodiment, the card insertion notification display mode and the card balance display mode are displayed with a 30-second cycle. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a 60-second cycle may be used. Any period may be used. In addition, by setting the card insertion notification display mode and the card balance display mode to a prohibited period that is not displayed in a gaming state (for example, a state in which a variable display mode of a specific special symbol is being variably displayed), The trouble that cannot concentrate on the game can be prevented by the insertion notification display mode and the card balance display mode.

  In the present embodiment, the balance display mode is such that the character color is changed when the card balance is greater than or equal to a predetermined amount. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the character size (font) is changed or the character is changed. You may comprise so that it may blink.

  In the main controller 110, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a special symbol lottery is performed using the ball as a trigger, and then a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. Variation display of symbols is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5 (a), the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and as a result, the third symbol display device 81 has the first symbol display device. In response to the 37 variation display, the 3rd symbol variation display is performed.

  When the 3rd symbol variation display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, first, the 3rd symbol's high-speed variation display is started, and then a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds to 60 seconds). When elapses, the display switches to the medium symbol variation display of the third symbol, and further switches to the low symbol variation display of the third symbol. Here, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the stop display in which the main symbols of the same number (the third symbol) are aligned is performed, the variation effect is ended, and then the jackpot effect is started. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, a stop display in which the main symbols of the same number (the third symbol) are not aligned is performed, the variation effect ends, and if there is a pending start prize, The next special symbol will be drawn and the next variation effect will be started.

  The jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which the opening effect is performed, a period in which the round effect is performed, and a period in which the ending effect is performed. The opening effect is to notify the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on, and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed will be opened repeatedly, thereby increasing the player's expectation. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. In addition, the ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special gaming state and the game value given to the player after the jackpot ends (whether the special symbol is a high probability state or a normal symbol high probability state) ) To the player, or to notify the player that the lottery result will be a big win in the lottery of the special symbol that is put on hold (to perform a definite effect display).

  Further, since the first entrance 64 is a winning entrance from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric symbol is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball enters the first entrance. As it easily enters the ball opening 64, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of possessions or a state in which the possession is not decreased even if a game is performed. You can get a feeling of a period that you can get a big jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game continuously.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating, by a lighting state, whether or not a normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the second entrance 67, As a stop symbol after the end of the change, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Fluctuation display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is activated for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured such that a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is reserved up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of balls held is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed in the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed so as to become a big hit stop symbol. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the game state transitions to a special game state (a big hit of 5 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated five times (five rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 only in one direction. The main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 are configured to transmit commands in both directions.

  In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select the special symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type in the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 A special hit type counter C2 to be used, a stop type selection counter C3 used to select an outage stop type in the special symbol, a special initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the special hit random number counter C1, A variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection is used. Further, the normal winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 24). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance slot. Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). The configuration is back. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the special initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

  The special initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the special hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the special initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The special initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first ball slot 64. It is stored in the area 203a. And the value of the random number which becomes the special symbol jackpot is set by a special symbol jackpot random number table (FIG. 10A), which will be described later, stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and is incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), the value returns to 0. The value of the special hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first symbol The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the display corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The aspect is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  With reference to FIG. 10, each data stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 10A is a diagram schematically showing a part of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the ROM 202, a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a regular symbol random number table 202c, a jackpot variation pattern table 202d, a variation pattern table 202e for release, a variation pattern table 202f for ordinary symbols, and a stop type command for ordinary symbols 202g is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (b), the jackpot random number table 202a has a hit counter value for determining whether or not the special hit random number counter C1 acquired when a game ball enters the first entrance 64 is determined. It is a set data table. When the special symbol has a low probability (normal game state), the value of the special hit random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit is set to one, specifically, "7" is a hit counter that is determined to be a big hit. Is set to a value. In addition, when the special symbol has a high probability (probability game state), the value of the special winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a big hit is set to 10, and specifically, “0 to 9” is determined to be a big hit. Is set to the hit counter value.

  As shown in FIG. 10C, the jackpot type table 202b is a hit counter that is determined to be hit by a special hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the game ball entering the first entrance 64. If it is a value, it is a data table for determining whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B. When the value of the special hit type counter CS2 obtained is one of “0 to 49” based on the game ball entering the first entrance 64, the big hit A (15R normal big hit) is It is determined. On the other hand, when the value of the acquired special hit type counter CS2 is any of “50 to 99”, the big hit B (15R probability variable big hit) is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 10D, the normal symbol random number table 202c is a hit counter value for determining whether or not the normal hit random number counter C4 acquired when the game ball passes through the second entrance 67. Is a data table in which is set. When the normal symbol has a low probability (normal game state), the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 determined to be win is set to “5 to 28”. Further, when the normal symbol has a high probability (short-time gaming state), the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 determined to be a win is set to “5 to 204”.

  The jackpot variation pattern table 202d is a variation pattern that is selected as a variation display mode of the third symbol when the determination result of the special symbol is a jackpot, and a plurality of jackpots based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 One jackpot variable display mode is determined from among the variable display modes for use (dynamic display mode for jackpots).

  The deviation variation pattern table 202e is data in which a plurality of deviation variation patterns (dynamic deviation display manners) selected as the variation display manner of the third symbol are stored when the determination result of the special symbol is wrong. It is a table. The variation pattern for deviation is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  The stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stops. “Reach out” (for example, 98, 99), “Leach other than out of front / rear out” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before or after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach, and “Complete” without reach Three stop (rendering) patterns, such as “off” (for example, a range of 0 to 89), are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

In the variation pattern table 202e for detachment, a plurality of variation patterns are set with respect to the variation mode determined by the stop type selection counter C3, and the values of the variation type selection counter CS1 are assigned and acquired. One deviation variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  The normal symbol variation pattern table 202f is a data table in which a variation variation pattern and a variation variation pattern of a variation variation pattern for a normal symbol with a low probability and a variation pattern for a normal symbol with a high probability are stored. As for the variation pattern for the low probability of the normal symbol, the normal symbol variation display is executed on the second symbol display device 83 for 30 seconds for both the hit variation pattern and the deviation variation pattern. In addition, the normal symbol variation display is executed for 3 seconds on the second symbol display device 83 for both the variation variation pattern and the variation variation pattern for the high probability of the ordinary symbol. As the variation pattern of the normal symbol, one type of variation pattern is set for each of the low probability and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  The normal symbol stop type command 202g is used to set whether to turn on “O” or “X” as the stop symbol (second symbol) after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished. It is a command. If the normal symbol win / fail determination result is a hit, a normal symbol stop type command 202g for turning on “O” indicating the hit of the normal symbol is set. On the other hand, if the result of determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct is out, a common symbol stop type command 202g for turning on “x” indicating that the normal symbol is out is set.

  When the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed with “◯” indicating a normal symbol hit, the first entrance 64 is “0.2 seconds ×× when the normal symbol has a low probability. It is opened only once. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) at the high probability of the normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened “one second × twice”. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes “3 seconds → 30 seconds” much longer than when the normal symbol has a low probability, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a high probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened “only twice per second” when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). The update is repeated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 9, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 24), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 23) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a probability change flag. 203e, an hour and middle counter 203f, a card balance storage area 203g, and another storage area 203h.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas has a special per-random number counter C1, Each value of the special hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) where winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when a ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the start winning, a big hit lottery of the original special symbol Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3). The prediction is described as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the determination result from the winning information command and stores it as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 233.

  The winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is mainly stored in a special symbol for the player in the hold change process (FIG. 30, S1608) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 described later. This is used to notify whether there is a big hit on hold. Further, in the present embodiment, it is used for notifying whether there is a big hit in the hold, but not limited to this, the winning information includes the variation pattern and stop type in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. It may be stored and notified about the hold of the special symbol that will be reached, or may be used as appropriate for other effects.

  Similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a normal random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for a normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the holding first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, and as in the case of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other reserved areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which data is packed into a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. This special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to an initial value of zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. Addition is performed (see S404 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 16).

  The value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 16 and S405 in FIG. 18). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and the variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, it is possible to correct the deviation by the next reserved ball number command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 lights the reserved ball number symbol of the second symbol display device 83 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable symbol display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero. Each time the ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 19).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, the normal random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. It is not performed (S603 of FIG. 20: No).

  The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (a special symbol high probability state). The probability variation flag 203e is displayed when the special symbol variation process (FIG. 16, S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines that the lottery result of the special symbol to be stopped is a big hit. If it is determined that it is B, it is set to ON (S213 in FIG. 16). On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is A, it is set to off (S214 in FIG. 16). The probability variation flag 203e is set to off when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized. In addition, the system is configured to be backed up when a power interruption occurs.

  The hour / minute counter 203f is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the short / medium counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110 and the special symbol determined to be a big win is stopped and displayed, the big hit type is a big hit A If it is, 100 is set to the hour / middle counter (S214 in FIG. 16).

  The card balance storage area 203g is a storage area for storing information on the card balance inserted in the card reading unit 300 based on the card extraction signal output from the payout control device 111. The card balance storage area 203g stores an initial value of 0 when the RAM 203 is initialized. When there is a difference between the balance information indicated by the display information of the balance indicator 41 indicated by the received card extraction signal and the value of the card balance storage area 203g, the value of the card balance storage area 203g is based on the received card extraction signal. It is updated with the value of the balance information.

  The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines that the card is inserted in the card reading unit 300 when the balance information having a value greater than 0 is stored in the card balance storage area 203g. Also, display information on the balance indicator 41 indicating that no card is inserted (in this embodiment, the first LED 41a is "-", the second LED 41b is "-", and the third LED 41c is "-" "--- When the card extraction signal indicating that “is displayed” is received, the initial value of 0 is stored in the card balance storage area 203g.

  The other storage area 203h is a storage area in which various other counter values, other flags, and the like that are necessary when the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 controls the pachinko machine 10 are appropriately stored.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, the extraction signal line of the balance display 41, the card reading unit 300, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The balance indicator 41 that displays the card balance of the card inserted in the card reading unit 300 is configured by arranging three 7-segment LEDs in a line as shown in FIG. It is a 7-segment LED indicating the position, the first LED 41a disposed on the left side, the 7-segment LED indicating the thousandth position of the balance, the second LED 41b disposed in the center, and the 7-segment LED indicating the hundredth position of the balance. It is comprised by 3rd LED41c arrange | positioned on the right side. Each 7-segment LED is composed of seven segments, segment Ma to segment Mg, and one signal line is connected to each segment so that each segment can be turned on independently. .

  The signal lines connecting the card reading unit 300 and the balance display 41 are provided with extraction means (LDa to LDc) (in this embodiment, phototransistors) for extracting signals for lighting each segment. Each signal extracted by the extraction means (LDa to LDc) is input to the input / output port 215 of the payout control device 111. The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 outputs the signal input to the input / output port 215 to the main control device 110 as it is for the same control signal for every execution cycle (in this embodiment, every 2 ms). Is configured to do.

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 outputs the signals extracted by the extraction means (LDa to LDc) to the main control device 110 with the same contents as those input to the input / output port 215. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111 may be configured to generate a dedicated command based on each input signal.

  Further, in the present embodiment, seven signal lines are connected to each of the extraction means (LDa to LDc) to the payout control device 202, and a total of 21 signal lines are connected. First, an IC to which a signal output for each extraction means (LDa to LDc) is input is provided, and seven signal lines output in common from each IC are connected to the payout control device 111. The payout control device 111 is provided with a chip selector for designating the IC, and three signal lines connected from the chip selector to each IC are connected. Therefore, ten signal lines are connected from the IC to the payout control device 111, and the number of signal lines connected to the payout control device 111 can be reduced. The IC may be provided on a relay board or the like, or may be provided on a board of the balance indicator 41. When it is provided on the substrate of the balance indicator 41, it is possible to connect to each IC by a printed line, and it is possible to reduce troubles such as harness connection. Further, an IC may be provided in the payout control device 202 so that the number of harnesses between the main control device 201 and the payout control device 111 is reduced.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). In addition, the firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). The display control device 114 controls the display mode setting of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the password is input and set, and the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Or the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the contents of the effect at the time of super reach, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a control program necessary for the MPU 221 to execute control, various data, and the like. In addition, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a secondary card information storage area 223e, and a return are returned. At least a lock flag 223f, a handle counter 223g, a password storage area 223h, a secondary return button flag 223i, a lottery counter 223j, a card return effect flag 223k, a customer waiting counter 223m, and another storage area 223n are provided. ing.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In this pachinko machine 10, when a start winning is made in the main controller 110, from each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start win, Various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the various pieces of predicted information are The control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the result of the determination of the winning / failure determination is extracted as winning information from the various information notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Is remembered. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Thus, the counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of balls to be held (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64, or in the main controller 110, variation display in a special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1508 in FIG. 28). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for lighting the reserved ball number symbol in the second symbol display device 83.

  The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1502 in FIG. 28), and is turned off when setting of variation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1602 in FIG. 29). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1505 in FIG. 28), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1616 in FIG. 29).

  The slave card information storage area 223e receives the card information command (see S704 in FIG. 21) output from the main controller 110 based on the signal extracted by the extraction means (LDa to LDc). This is a storage area for storing the card balance indicated by the card information command. The slave card information storage area 223e is set to 0 when the gaming machine is initialized.

  The return lock flag 223f is a flag indicating whether a return button 42, which will be described later, is set to be valid (valid) or invalid (whether it is invalid). When the return button 42 is invalidated and the player operates the return button 42, if the card is not returned from the card reading unit 300, the return lock flag 223f is set to ON. On the other hand, in a state where the return button 42 is activated and the player operates the return button 42 to return the card from the card reading unit 300, the return lock flag 223f is set to OFF. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the return button 42 is enabled and set, and the return lock flag 223f is set to OFF.

  The handle counter 223g is a counter that is incremented (updated) one by one when the player releases the operation handle 51 (the handle sensor 51a is in an off state) (see S1809 in FIG. 32). When the handle sensor 51a is turned on, the value of the handle counter 223g is reset to zero. That is, the handle count 223g is a counter for measuring the time when the player releases the hand from the operation handle 51, and it is possible to determine the time when the player releases the hand from the operation handle 51 based on the value of the counter. it can.

  The password storage area 223h is a storage area for storing a password for switching between invalidation and validation of the return button 42. Although details will be described later, a 4-digit password arbitrarily determined by the player operating the frame button 22 on the password setting screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored (see S2023 in FIG. 35). ). On the other hand, when a password is stored in the password storage area 223h, the frame button 22 is operated on the password input screen displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the same password stored in the password storage area 223g. Is reset to 0 (S2029 in FIG. 35). The password storage area 223h stores “0” which is an initial state when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized. Also, if a power interruption occurs, it is backed up.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is reset when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized. Therefore, if the player forgets the password, a store clerk is called and the pachinko machine 10 is initialized. The card can be returned by getting it. In the present embodiment, the password is initialized when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a dedicated password initialization switch may be provided. The password initialization switch can be initialized by operating the game store with a key, thereby preventing the password from being initialized illegally. Also, by providing a dedicated initialization switch, there is no need to initialize the pachinko machine 10, and the password can be initialized without initializing the gaming state or the like. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 10 during the jackpot or probability change game is initialized, it is possible to initialize the password and validate the return button 42 even in a state where it is disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, the card can be returned to the player at an early stage, and the player can be prevented from forgetting to return the card.

  The sub return button flag 223i is a flag that is set to ON when a card is inserted in the card reading unit 300 and the return button 42 is operated in a state where the return button 42 is activated (FIG. 31). S1709). On the other hand, if it is determined that the return button 42 has not been operated, it is set to OFF (see S1710 in FIG. 31). With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the player has operated the return button 42 in order to return the card inserted in the card reading unit 300.

  If the special symbol variation display mode received from the main controller 110 is a jackpot variation display mode, the lottery counter 223j is in a state where a card is inserted and the return button 42 is activated. It is a counter value for determining whether to execute the return variation display mode. The lottery counter 223j is a counter value that is repeatedly updated in the range of “0 to 99”. Is done. The lottery counter 223j is incremented by 1 each time the command output process (FIG. 26, S1302) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed. The value is updated to 0. In the state where the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the lottery counter 223j is set to 0, which is an initial value.

  Although the details will be described later, as shown in FIG. 4B, the return variation display mode is a variation in which the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is output from the main controller 110. This is a dedicated variable display mode in which the display mode of the variable display mode is changed by causing the player to operate the return button 42 in the middle of the variable display mode, which is different from the variable display mode indicated by the pattern command. This return fluctuation display mode is set with the same fluctuation time as the fluctuation display mode indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from main controller 110.

  The card return effect flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not a return variation display mode has been determined. This card return effect flag 223k is set to ON when the return variation display mode is determined (S1613 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, when the jackpot game is started, when it is determined that the variation display mode indicated by the variation pattern command received from main controller 110 is not the jackpot variation display mode, it is set to off. In the state where the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

  The customer waiting counter 223m is a counter for measuring a period during which the variation of the special symbol is stopped (a period in which a game ball does not enter the first entrance 64 and a lottery game is not executed). The customer waiting counter 223m is updated one by one based on the fact that the variation of the special symbol is stopped (S1402 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is changing, the initial value is reset to zero. When the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the initial value is set to 0.

  The other storage area 223n is a storage area in which other various data necessary for the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 to execute various controls of the pachinko machine 10, various other flags, and the like are stored.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 28) of the audio lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113 receives a return signal output to the card reading unit from the return button 42 for returning the card inserted in the card reading unit 300 provided on the front frame 14. The return extraction signal extracted by the return extraction means 42a is input.

  In addition, the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113 also receives signals from a ball removal button sensor 52a for detecting the operation of the ball removal button 52, a human sensor 400 provided on the front frame 14, and a break button 500, respectively. It is configured to be entered.

  The electrical connection between the card reading unit 300 and the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. The card reading unit 300 and the pachinko machine 10 connect a connector configured by a plurality of signal lines from the card reading unit 300 to a card reading unit connection board (not shown) provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Are electrically connected. As shown in FIG. 11, a signal (DC 24 V) generated by a power supply device 115 provided in the pachinko machine 10 is used as a power source of signals necessary for exchange between the card reading unit 300 and the pachinko machine 10. It is supplied to the card reading unit 300 side. The supplied voltage is input to the power supply circuit J1 of the card reading unit 300, generates a voltage (VL) of DC18V from the input DC24V, and outputs it to the pachinko machine 10 side via the card reading unit connection board. To do.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the voltage (VL) of DC18V output from the card reading unit 300 is used as a driving voltage for the ball lendable LED 40a, the balance display 41, a phototransistor for extracting a signal, and the like. It is also used as a signal for the pachinko machine 10 to recognize the connection with the card reading unit 300. Further, although not shown, the power supply circuit J1 of the card reading unit 300 generates each voltage necessary for the operation of each part of the card reading unit 300 in addition to the voltage (VL) of DC18V. To supply.

  Although not shown, the card reading unit 300 is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU temporarily stores a ROM, which is a nonvolatile memory storing various control programs executed by the MPU, fixed value data, and the like, and various data, etc., when executing the control program stored in the ROM. In addition, a random access memory and other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. The MPU is connected to a bus line including an address bus and a data bus, and this bus line is connected to the input / output port N1 shown in FIG. In addition to this bus line, the card input lamp 301, the money amount setting button 302, the fraction display button 303, the connection direction display lamp 304, the card insertion lamp 306, and the card insertion slot 306 are inserted into the input / output port N1. A reader / writer (not shown) for reading a card (such as a magnetic card or an IC card) is connected.

  This reader / writer includes a magnetic head having a reader function for reading money amount information and the like from the card inserted into the card insertion 306 and a writer function for writing money amount information of the balance amount after use to the card. ing. When the amount information of the balance amount of the card inserted by the reader / writer is read, it is determined that the card is being inserted. Further, when the balance amount newly written to the card by the reader / writer becomes “0”, the card inserted from the card insertion slot 306 is forcibly forced from the card insertion slot 306 by an actuator (not shown). Discharged.

  The card reading unit 300 outputs signals for lighting the 7-segment LEDs 41a to 41c of the balance indicator 41 provided on the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10, respectively, with three phototransistors S1 and seven phototransistors S2. Are output to the pachinko machine 1 side through a predetermined cycle (for example, every 1 ms). For example, when the ball lending button 43 is operated and a ball for 500 yen is paid out, the signal is switched so that the balance display is turned on when the payout is completed and the balance display is subtracted by 500 yen.

  Three phototransistors S1 are provided corresponding to the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c of the balance indicator 41, respectively. The seven phototransistors S2 are provided corresponding to the seven segments Ma to Mg constituting the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c, respectively.

  For example, if the phototransistor S2 corresponding to the segment Md is turned on while the phototransistor S1 corresponding to the first LED 41a at the hundreds position of the balance indicator 41 is turned on, the LED of the segment Md of the first LED 41a of the balance indicator 41 is turned on. Lights up. That is, “-” is displayed on the first LED 41a of the balance display 41 (see FIG. 7). Further, if all the seven phototransistors S2 are turned on while the phototransistor S1 corresponding to the tenth second LED 41b of the balance indicator 41 is turned on, the seven segments Ma˜ of the second LED 41b of the balance indicator 41 are turned on. All the Mg lights up and “8” is displayed on the second LED 41b.

  12 extracts signals output from the card reading unit 300 by the phototransistors LDa to LDc (extraction means) in order to turn on the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c of the balance indicator 41 in FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a configuration of branching and outputting to an input / output port 215 of the payout control device 111. The phototransistors LDa to LDc used here are provided with resistors on the collector side to prevent a problem that the current flowing from the collector to the emitter becomes too large and short-circuits. The emitter side is connected to the ground. In the present embodiment, the emitter side is connected to the ground, and the signal is activated by drawing current. However, as shown as a modification of the phototransistors LDa to LDc in FIG. A configuration may be adopted in which a signal is activated by a configuration in which a current is supplied to the device 111 side.

  The phototransistor LDa is for extracting (branching) signals for lighting the segments Ma to Mg of the first LED 41a of the balance indicator 14, and corresponds to each of the seven segments Ma to Mg. A total of seven are provided one by one.

  The phototransistor LDb corresponds to the seven segments Ma to Mg of the second LED 41b, and the phototransistor LDc corresponds to the seven segments Ma to Mg of the third LED 41c, respectively, in the same manner as the phototransistor LDa. Seven are provided. The phototransistors LDa to LDc are respectively provided on the LED substrates on which the 7-segment LEDs 41a to 41c of the balance indicator 41 are provided. In the present embodiment, the phototransistor is used as the extracting means. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any other means can be used as long as it can extract other signals. For example, it may be detected from the outside of the signal line whether a current has flowed due to a change in the magnetic field, or may be detected by directly branching a signal.

  As described above, the phototransistors LDa to LDc extract (branch) the lighting signals of the respective segments Ma to Mg, so that the phototransistors LDa to LDc transmit signals with light, so there is no electrical wiring. An illegal electrical signal can be prevented from being output to the pachinko machine 10 side via the reading unit 300. Therefore, it is possible to reduce damage caused by fraudulent acts made by illegally changing electrical wiring. Note that the connection (signal transmission / reception) between the card reading unit 300 and the pachinko machine 1 is performed via a photodiode, and an illegal electrical signal is not transmitted / received from the card reading unit 300. In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 side receives the signal output from the card reading unit 300 using a photodiode, the phototransistor diode cannot be turned on from the pachinko machine 10 side, and the pachinko machine 10 It is difficult to output an illegal signal from the side to the card reading unit 300 side. Therefore, the fraud in which an illegal signal is output to the card reading unit 300 from the pachinko machine 10 side can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. When power is applied to the pachinko machine 10, the card reading unit 300 is supplied with power from the pachinko machine 10 via the power supply device 115 to the power circuit on the card unit 300 side. A power supply circuit supplies the necessary power. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit, the card reading unit 300 rises based on a predetermined program, and when normal control is possible, the player is informed that the card can be inserted into the card insertion slot 306. The card usable lamp 300 to be notified is turned on. When a card is inserted into the card insertion slot 306, it is read whether the card is normal. If it is normal, the card insertion lamp 305 is turned on and the card based on the balance inserted into the balance display 41 is displayed. Controlled to display balance. The lighting control of the balance indicator 41 is as described above. Further, the operation of the ball lending button 43 and the return button 42 provided on the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 is set to be acceptable (a state in which the received signal is determined to be valid).

  From the card reading unit 300 to the pachinko machine 10, a unit preparation signal BO for indicating to the pachinko machine 10 that the card reading unit 300 is in a lending state, and from the card reading unit 300 to the pachinko machine 10, In order to light up the lending instruction completion signal YQ which is a signal indicating a lending execution request and a lending execution instruction, and the lendable LED 40a for informing that the player is provided with the front frame 14 that the lending is possible. The ball lending lighting signal RO is output to the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 ready signal PO indicating to the card reading unit 300 that the pachinko machine 10 is in a ball lending state and the lending output from the card reading unit 300 to the card reading unit 300. A ball lending completion signal ED indicating a response to the ball lending execution request of the instruction completion signal YQ and the end of the ball lending operation performed for the ball lending execution instruction of the lending instruction completion signal YQ (end of lending of the ball lending); A card return signal HS that is output when the return button 42 provided on the front frame 14 is operated, and a ball lending operation signal KS that is output when the ball lending button 43 is operated are output. Yes.

  With reference to FIG. 13, the electrical connection between the card return button 42 and the card reading unit 300 will be described. On the pachinko machine 10 side, the card return signal HS signal is extracted by the return extraction means 42a (phototransistor), and the extracted signal is input to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. It has become. Further, on the pachinko machine 10 side, a photo MOS relay is provided as a changeover switch (switching means) 42b on the card reading unit 300 side rather than the return extraction means 42a. The signal line between the card reading unit 300 and the return button 42 is configured to be switched between a disconnected state and a connected state. In the present embodiment, the signal from the sound lamp control device 113 to the changeover switch (photo MOS relay) 42b is active and the return button 42 is activated, that is, the signal line is connected, In a non-active state, the return button 42 is disabled, that is, the signal line is set to a disconnected state.

  Between the return extraction means (phototransistor) 42a and the changeover switch (photo MOS relay) 42b, the voice lamp control device 113 activates the card return signal HS even when the return button 42 is not operated. A forced return signal is input. The return extraction means 42a and the changeover switch b are provided on the same substrate, and are connected to the return button 42 and provided on the front frame 14.

  As described above, since the card return signal HS output from the return button 42 of the pachinko machine 10 can be extracted, it can be determined whether the player has operated the card return button 42. In addition, since the signal line that connects the return button 42 and the card reading unit 300 can be switched between a disconnected state and a connected state by a signal from the sound lamp control device 113 by the changeover switch 42b, the return button 42 is disabled. You can switch between enabling and enabling. Therefore, even when a game is played with the card inserted into the card reading unit 300, it is possible to prevent the card from being stolen by disabling the card return button 42.

  The return button 42 is electrically connected directly to the card reading unit 300 provided outside the pachinko machine 10, but the control device for the pachinko machine 10 of the return button 42 (in this embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113). ) Is connected via a phototransistor and is not directly electrically connected. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized electric signal from being output from the outside of the pachinko machine 10 to the control device of the pachinko machine 10 via the return button 42. Further, the changeover switch 42b is also constituted by a photo MOS relay, thereby preventing the control device from being directly and electrically connected to the outside. In addition, by using a phototransistor, it is possible to transmit a one-way signal that is output from the side of the phototransistor that turns on the diode, so that an illegal signal is output from the other (non-diode side). Can be prevented. Therefore, an illegal signal can be prevented from being output to one side.

  In the present embodiment, a phototransistor is used as the return extraction unit 42a. In the embodiment, a photo MOS relay is used as the changeover switch 42b. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a relay or the like. Good. In the present embodiment, the return extraction signal is input to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. You may comprise so that it may input.

  FIG. 14A is a block diagram simply showing the electrical connection between the card reading unit 300 and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. FIG. 2B is a diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to Modification 1 of the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, a card is inserted into the card reading unit 300, or information on the card balance is extracted by extracting signals for lighting the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c of the balance indicator 41. The output is made to the control device 111. Instead, in the first modification, the signal is output to the main controller 110. Further, a control signal related to ball lending output from the card reading unit 300 is also output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is configured to output a pachinko-side preparation signal PO or the like to the card reading unit 300 by determining whether or not the ball lending is possible based on the control signal output from the payout control device 111. ing. Further, when the MPU of the main control device 110 receives a control signal from the card reading unit 300, the MPU outputs a signal corresponding to the signal to the payout control device 111.

  The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines whether a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 based on signals output from the phototransistors LDa to LDc. Then, based on the determined information, a notification process similar to that of the first embodiment is performed. With this configuration, card insertion information and card balance information are directly input to the main control device 110, so that control can be performed promptly.

  In the present embodiment, the control signal related to the ball rental output from the card reading unit 300 is output to the main control device 110. However, the control signal is output to the payout control device 111 as in the first embodiment, and the photo Only the signals output from the transistors LDa to LDc may be output to the main controller 110. With this configuration, the control related to ball lending can be performed regardless of the instruction from the main control device 110 by the payout control device 111, and the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Next, FIG.2 (c) is the figure which showed the electrical structure of the pachinko machine 10 in the modification 2 of 1st Embodiment. In the second modification, a control signal related to ball lending output from the card reading unit 300 is output to the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113, and a signal obtained by extracting the signals output from the phototransistors LDa to LDc is sound. It differs from the first embodiment in that it is output to the lamp control device 113. With this configuration, the audio lamp control device 113 directly receives signals output from the phototransistors LDa to LDc, and the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is based on the card information indicated by the received signal. By performing notification similar to that of the first embodiment, the main control device 110 does not need to perform control for notification, and the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. Further, since the control signal is not output from the sound lamp control device 113 to the main control device 110, since the signal output from the card reading unit 300 is not output to the main control device 110, fraud can be reduced. .

  In this embodiment, the control signal related to the ball rental output from the card reading unit 300 is output to the sound lamp control device 113. However, the signal related to the ball rental is the same as in the first embodiment. As a configuration for outputting to 111, only a signal output from the phototransistors LDa to LDc may be output to the sound lamp control device 113. With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 does not need to output a control signal related to ball lending to the payout control device 111, and the control load on the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  Next, FIG.2 (d) is the figure which showed the electrical structure of the pachinko machine 10 in the modification 3 of 1st Embodiment. In the third modification, after the signals output from the phototransistors LDa to LDc are output to the payout control device 111, the signals output from the phototransistors LDa to LDc from the payout control device 111 to the sound lamp control device 113 are displayed. This is different from the first embodiment in that the signal shown is output. With this configuration, since the signal output from the payout control device 111 is not output to the main control device 110, fraud with respect to the main control device 110 can be suppressed. Further, a signal indicating a signal output from the phototransistors LDa to LDc is output to the sound lamp control device 113 without going through the main control device 110, and the card information is discriminated by the sound lamp control device 113, so that the first implementation is performed. Since the notification similar to the embodiment is executed, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, in the first embodiment and the first to third modifications of the first embodiment, the enclosed pachinko machine (pachinko machine in which a game ball is not directly paid out to a player and a game is played with the game ball stored in the game machine) Can also be used. In the enclosed pachinko machine, a configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 extracts the card information of the card reading unit 300 and uses it for notifying and producing, but also outputting it to a hall computer or a management computer is conceivable.

  In addition, in 1st Embodiment and the modifications 1-3 of 1st Embodiment, it was set as the structure which uses the card reading unit 300 which uses a card | curd, but it is not restricted to this, The prepaid medium in which money amount information (valuable value) was memorize | stored For example, it is possible to use a reading unit using, for example, a coin having a built-in IC chip or a stick.

  In addition, in the first embodiment and the first to third modifications of the first embodiment, the card reading unit 300 can be used for a slot game machine (rotating game machine) that lends medals. It is.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, as another configuration, an optical sensor for detecting the light amount of the 7-segment LED of the balance indicator 41 is provided in the frame of the pachinko machine 10, and the signal of the optical sensor is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. The card information may be notified by inputting into the card information. The balance information of the card information is stored in advance with the amount of light corresponding to the balance display, and based on the detected amount of light, the balance is determined, or the light sensor is changed to an image recognition sensor to recognize the image. Thus, the balance of the card may be detected by recognizing the balance display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from outputting a signal for performing fraud through the card reading unit 300. Moreover, since control can be performed based on the actually displayed information, more accurate notification can be performed. Also, the balance display is detected from the back side, the top side, or the surroundings of the LED display, and no sensor is arranged on the front side, so that the visibility of the player's balance display is not impaired. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description of the first embodiment will be continued. The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81. Based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the special control (third symbol) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the display of fluctuation (fluctuation effect) and the like. Since this display control device 114 is already known, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 15 to 36. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the special initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the special initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the special initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the RAM 203. Store in the corresponding buffer area.

  Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the normal hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are set to the maximum values (in this embodiment, 399 respectively). , 99, 99, 239), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing with the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is performed. Processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. After executing the through gate passing process, the card process is executed (S108), then the firing control process is executed (S109), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S110). The timer interrupt process ends. Although details of the card processing will be described later, processing for setting various types of information on the card inserted into the card reading unit 300 is executed based on the extraction signal output from the payout control device 111. The firing control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of the firing of the sphere. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation processing (FIG. 16, S104), first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If it has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the big hit according to the value of the special hit type counter C2 Whether it will be A or big hit B is determined.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process is as follows. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), it is determined which of the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B) is the jackpot type (S211). If the jackpot is A, 100 is set to the hour / minute counter 203f of the RAM 203 (S214). If the jackpot type is jackpot B, the probability variation flag 203e is set to ON (S213). Then, the special symbol jackpot start is set (S215), and the process ends. When the start of special symbol jackpot is set by the processing of S215, the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed, and the jackpot effect is started.

  In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1. If it is above (S216: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the hour / minute counter 203e (S217), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / middle counter 203f is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 16) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and is an execution area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the changed effect.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired ( S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on (S302). The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state. If the probability variation flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol certain variation state. If the flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state.

  If the probability change flag 203e is on (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state, the probability variation determination determination flag 203h is turned on (S303), and the process proceeds to S304. In the process of S304, based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S304). ). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with 30 random numbers stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, ten random numbers “0 to 9” are set as the special symbol jackpot random numbers, and the value of the special random number counter C1 matches the random number value to which these hits. In this case, it is determined that the jackpot is a special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S306.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the probability variation flag 203e is off (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301, Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is jackpot is acquired (S305). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the three random number values stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability. As the random number value that is a special symbol jackpot, one of “7” is set, and when the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches the random number value that hits the special symbol jackpot It is determined that If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S306.

  Then, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the process of S304 or S305 is a special symbol jackpot (S306). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S306: Yes), Based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode for the big hit is set (S307). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the special symbol big hit type table, and the two types of special big hits (big hit A, big hit) In B), the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that the jackpot A (15R normal jackpot, 100 times of time reduction), and in the range of “50 to 99”. If there is, it is determined that the jackpot B (15R probability variation jackpot) (see FIG. 10C).

  In the processing of S307, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern (variation display mode) at the time of jackpot is determined (S308). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S308, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like. For example, variation patterns for detachment are defined as “displacement (for a long time)”, “detachment (for a short time)”, “reason normal reach”, “reason superreach”, and “reason special reach”. ing.

  In the process of S306, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S306: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S309). In the processing of S309, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out.

  Here, the stop type is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed and the reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  When the processing of S308 or the processing of S310 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S308 or S310 is set (S311). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S312). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 24, S1000). Sent. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, start winning information processing (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 15), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 and there is a start winning. This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 18) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) in the first entrance 64 (S401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  And, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reservation balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserve ball number command by the process of S405, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203 special values. It stores in the first area among the empty reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, for the various counters acquired in the process of S406, based on the gaming state (low probability gaming state or high probability gaming state) at the start of variation, whether or not the special symbol is determined, the stop type, and the variation pattern to be selected Pre-fetching of the lottery result in the special symbol that predicts (S407).

  If the process of S407 predicts whether the lottery is a special symbol, a stop type (a jackpot type in the case of jackpot), and a variation pattern, then the predicted lottery is predicted, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S408).

  The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the result of the winning / notifying determination from the winning information command, and stores the information as winning information in the corresponding area of the winning information storage area 223a.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S501). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is showing the winning indication, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S504). If the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the processing of S506, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S508). The time reduction / intermediate counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S509). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first inlet 64 is released. This is to prevent the balls that are going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening 65a is not limited to the first winning opening even if the ball is prevented from entering the first winning opening 64 during the big hit of the special symbol. A lot of balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S509, if the special symbol is not big hit (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, so acquired in the process of S507. Based on the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 and the normal probability random number table for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 10D).

  In the process of S508, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S508: No), the process proceeds to S511. In the processing of S511, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the normal random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S507 and the low probability Based on the hourly normal symbol random number table, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 10D).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S510 or S511 is a normal symbol win (S512). If it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S512: Yes) The display mode for winning is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S514). It is determined whether or not (S515). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol is off In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S515, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in a special symbol big hit, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol. The opening period of the electric accessory attached to 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S614, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S514: No), the process proceeds to S517. In the process of S517, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of releases is set to 1 (S517), and the process proceeds to S519.

  If it is determined in step S512 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S512: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S518). In the process of S518, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S519, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S519), and if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S519: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 is detected. The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S519: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the first entrance 64 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S522). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S520 or the processing of S521 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the processing of S522 (S522: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S522 (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the “○” symbol as the second symbol is stopped in the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lighted display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S518, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). When the stop display is set by the process of S523, when the normal symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S513 or S518.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S524). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set (S525), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric power article is set by the processing of S525, when the electric power object opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed next, the electric character object opening / closing control is performed. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S516 or S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through-gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through-gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the second entrance 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the normal hit random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S602). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the second entrance 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is 4. If not less than this (S603: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the number of normal symbol reserved balls The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the normal random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the area (S605), and this process is terminated. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, card processing (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this card processing (S108). This card process (S108) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 15), and is generated based on the extraction signal extracted by the extraction means (LDa to LDc) output from the payout control device 111. This is a process for determining the balance of the card inserted in the card reading unit 300 from the card extraction signal and notifying the determined information to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the card processing (FIG. 21, S108), first, based on the card extraction signal output by the payout control device 111 received in the processing of S1003 of the main processing (FIG. 24, S1000) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, Display information of the balance display 41 is acquired (analyzed) (S701). It is determined whether there is a change in the card balance based on the value stored in the card balance storage area 203g and the display information acquired in the process of S701 (S702). When it is determined that there is a change in the card balance (S702: Yes), the balance information based on the acquired display information is stored (updated) in the card balance storage area 203g (S703). A card information command based on the card balance information stored in the card balance storage area 203g is generated (S704). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no change in the card balance (S702: No), this process ends.

  The card extraction signal output from the payout control device 111 is input to the input / output port of the main control device 110 as an 8-bit signal composed of eight signal lines. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 discriminates display information of the balance indicator 41 by discriminating the inputted card extraction signal composed of 8 bits. The card information command generated by the main controller 110 is composed of a 2-byte command, the upper byte is composed of a command indicating a command type (a command indicating a card balance), and the lower byte is composed of a command. It consists of commands that indicate card balance.

  As for the card extraction signal, although seven signal lines are respectively input from the extracting means LDa to LDc to the input / output port 215 of the payout control device 111, they are output to the main control device 110. The card extraction signal is composed of an 8-bit signal. This is because the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is based on the error display by setting the bit to ON when the balance indicator 41 displays an error for the upper 1 bit. The extracted signal can be easily identified. In the other 7 bits, signals extracted by the extraction means LDa to LDc are set. That is, the total number of signal lines connected from the extraction means LDa to LDc to the payout control device 111 is 21, and 8 card extraction signals are input from the payout control device 111 to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. This is a signal line. The payout control device 111 can identify each of the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c with the remaining 7 bits excluding the upper 1 bit based on the signals respectively input from the extraction means LDa to LDc, and the lighting mode of each segment. Generate an identifiable signal. For example, the light emission mode of each LED is a light emission mode (for example, “A” or the like) indicating numbers 0 to 9 and an error display, and “−” indicating that no card is inserted. The LED is configured to indicate the type of LED (any one of the first LED 41a to the third LED 41c) with 2 bits, and the signal corresponding to the light emission mode of the segment is configured with the remaining 5 bits. Further, as described above, the upper 1 bit is set to ON when the light emission mode indicates an error.

  Although omitted in the present embodiment, in the card processing, when a card extraction signal indicating that a display indicating an error is displayed on the balance display 41 is received, the signal indicating the error is externally transmitted to the hall computer. The output is made via a terminal (not shown). Further, the type of error display displayed on the balance display 41 may be determined, and an error signal corresponding to the error type may be output to a hall computer or the like via an external terminal. With this configuration, when the player tries to lend a ball using, for example, a fake bill, the card reading unit 300 displays an error display corresponding to the lending on the balance display 41. The game store can detect and deal with fraud without being noticed by the player.

  In this way, a signal that causes the card reading unit 300 to turn on the balance indicator 41 is extracted by the extraction means LDa to LDc, and the information is output to the main control device 110 as a card extraction signal via the payout control device 111. Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can determine whether a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 based on the information. Further, when there is a card balance, it is possible to accurately determine the amount of money and accurately notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the card balance. Further, even when the card balance changes, the card balance is newly displayed on the balance display 41 by the card reading unit 300, so that information based on the display is notified to the main controller 110. Based on the information, a new card information command can be generated and notified to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, based on the value of the card balance storage area 203g, a special symbol variation start process (FIG. 17, S208) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is configured to select the type of jackpot variation pattern or outlier variation pattern. May be. By configuring in this way, for example, when the card balance decreases, it is possible to select a super-reach fluctuation pattern with a high probability of being selected in the case of a hit such as outlier super-reach, so that the winning may be close. By making the player expect, it is possible to add money to the game even after the card balance has been spent. In addition, when the card balance is large (when it is larger than the set value), it is configured so that a variation pattern with a short variation time (dynamic display time) can be easily selected, so that the game can be efficiently performed and the card balance is When it becomes less (when it becomes less than the set value), it is easy to select a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time, so that it becomes a big hit such as reach or super reach. You may comprise so that the fluctuation pattern which is easy to be selected becomes easy to be selected. With this configuration, it is possible to play a game while expecting a big hit while shortening the game time.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 15) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 16) or the start winning process (see FIG. 18) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in S408 of the start winning process (FIG. 18, S105) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (S1004) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal, and the card extraction signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 outputs a card extraction signal based on a signal obtained by the card reading unit 300 extracting a signal for lighting the balance on the balance display 41 by the extraction means (LDa to LDc). In the present embodiment, the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is configured to output the signal extracted by the extraction means (LDa to LDc) as it is to the main control device 110 as a card extraction signal. Next, in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, a jackpot control process for executing a jackpot effect and opening or closing a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 22), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, a special symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the special symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S308 or the processing of S310 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 17), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed on the symbol display device 37. Start. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the special symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 17) or the process of S310 is completed, the first symbol display device 37 is used. In the display mode set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 17), the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol display device. 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, normal symbol display update processing for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the normal symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 19) or the process of S521, the variable symbol display device 83 starts the variable display. . Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, the normal symbol display update process is executed in the second symbol display device 83 when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 19). The variation display is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S513 or the processing of S518 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 19). indicate.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the processes after S1001 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009: No), the special process is not performed until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the special initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the special initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the special initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but varies. Therefore, the special initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated using the remaining time, whereby the special initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special per random number The initial value of the counter C1 and the initial value of the normal random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 22 has been executed, the power-off process after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S901), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 36, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S1318 is performed in this startup process due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”) (see FIG. 26 ) Is determined during execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 26, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 26), it executes a power-off process in S1318. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1318 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S1318 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, this start-up process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1318, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup process this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process in S1318, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1206). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1318 is executed (see S1320 in FIG. 26). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1318 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S1208. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1318 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1211), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1208 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and the interrupt permission is set. In step S1211, the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1209 is that when the process from S1204 to S1208 is reached via the process in S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S1301 was executed (S1301). If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes in S1302 to S1310. In S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1302 to S1310 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1311, the variable display setting process of S1312, and the process of updating the counter value in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the processing of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1303 to S1317 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1308 described later are set (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a waiting-for-waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process (S1305), when the time when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, the setting of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is performed as a command. To the display control device 114. In addition, referring to FIG. 27, details will be described later, but a process for executing setting of a password setting screen and a password input screen for switching between enabling and disabling of the return button 42 is also executed. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, the input of whether or not each operation button of the frame button 22 operated by the player to enhance the production effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process of setting to perform an effect or control process corresponding to the case. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1309 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1311). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1312, the card effect control process is executed (S1313). The card effect control process (S1313) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 31. When a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300, Processing for forcibly discharging the card or determining whether the return button 42 has been operated is executed.

  When the processing of S1313 is executed, card information processing for executing card information inserted into the card reading unit 300 and processing for preventing forgetting to return the card from the card reading unit 300 is executed ( S1314). Details of the card notification process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1314 is executed, when the return variation display mode is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 is operated based on the operation (pressing) of the return button 42. Then, the card return effect process for executing the process of displaying the fixed notification mode is executed (S1315). The details of the card return effect process (S1315) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1315 is executed, control related to password input is performed based on the operation of the frame button 22 on the password input screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for switching between enabling and disabling of the return button 42. A password input process for executing is executed (S1316). Details of the password input process (S1316) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1316 is executed, when the break button 500 is operated by the player, a break process for executing a process for invalidating the return button 42 is executed (S1317). Details of the break process (S1317) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1317 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1318). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1315 (S1318: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1317), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1320). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1321), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1318 (S1318: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1319), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1319: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1319: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the customer waiting effect process (S1305) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting effect process (S1305). This customer waiting effect process (S1305) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, after a special symbol fluctuates and stops for a predetermined time. When the time has elapsed, processing for displaying a password input screen or a password setting screen for enabling or disabling the return button 42 on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In the customer waiting effect process (S1305), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is stopped (that is, a lottery game is not being performed) on the third symbol display device 81 (S1401). When it is determined by the third symbol display device 81 that the special symbol is stopped (S1401: Yes), the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is incremented by 1 and updated. Since the customer waiting effect process (S1305) is normally executed at a period of 1 ms, it is possible to determine the time when the special symbol is stopped and displayed with the value of the counter value as a unit of ms. ing. It is determined whether a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1403). Here, whether or not a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 is determined based on a card information command received from the main controller 110 in a command determination process (FIG. 28, S1311) described later. Based on the data about the card balance stored in the card information storage area 223e, if the balance is greater than 0, it is determined that a card with a balance is inserted. That is, it is determined whether the card balance stored in the slave card information storage area 223e is a value greater than zero.

  When it is determined that a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1403: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is a value of 5 seconds or more ( S1404). If it is determined that the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is less than 5 seconds, the process of S1415 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is 5 seconds or more (S1404: Yes), it is determined whether there is data set in the password storage area 223h (S1405). Here, the password is stored in the password storage area 223h when a password is set by the player in a password input process (FIG. 34, S1316) described later. That is, the fact that the password is stored in the password storage area 223h indicates that the return button 42 has been invalidated by setting the password.

  If it is determined that the password is stored in the password storage area 223h (S1405: Yes), the display password for displaying the password input screen (see FIG. 5B) on the third symbol display device 81 Generate (set) input commands. On the other hand, if it is determined that no password is stored in the password storage area 223h (that is, the initial value 0 is stored in the password storage area 223m) (S1405: No), the customer waiting counter 223m It is determined whether the value is 30 seconds or more (S1407). When it is determined that the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is less than 30 seconds (S1407: No), a display for displaying a password setting screen (see FIG. 5A) on the third symbol display device 81 A password setting command is generated (set) (S1408).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the customer waiting counter 223m is 30 seconds or more (S1407: Yes), the characters “The return button has been disabled for crime prevention” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. For this purpose, a display lock notification command is generated (set) (S1409). A return button invalid signal for invalidating the return button 42 (a state in which no signal is output from the return button 42 even if the return button 42 is operated) is generated (S1410). A return lock flag 223f indicating that the return button 42 is invalidated is set to ON (S1411).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that a card with a balance is not inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1403: No), it is determined whether the customer waiting counter 223m has a value of 30 seconds or more (S1412). When it is determined that the customer waiting counter 223m has a value of 30 seconds or more, a display normal standby command for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is generated on the third symbol display device 81. (S1413). Further, if it is determined that the special symbol variation display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1401: No), the customer waiting counter 223m is reset (cleared) to the initial value 0 and set ( S1414).

  In the process of S1415, it is determined whether the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is within 30 seconds (S1415). When it is determined that the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is within 30 seconds (S1415: Yes), the subordinate return button flag i is set to ON (that is, the return button with the card inserted) 42 is operated) (S1416). If it is determined that the subordinate return button flag 223i is on (S1416: Yes), it is possible to download a wallpaper for displaying the title screen on the standby screen of a mobile phone or the like on the third symbol display device 81. A display two-dimensional code setting command for displaying a two-dimensional code is generated (set) (S1417). On the other hand, when it is determined that the customer waiting counter 223m has a value greater than 30 seconds (S1415: No), or when it is determined that the subordinate return button flag 223i is off (S1416: No), this The process ends.

  In this way, when a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300, the password input screen or the password setting screen is displayed when the special symbol is not changed for a predetermined time. Therefore, the player can be configured to set a password or start input without any particular operation by the player. In addition, when the return button 42 in which the password has already been set is disabled, the password input screen is displayed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed for a shorter time than when the password setting screen is displayed. Thus, when the player wants to activate the return button 42, it becomes possible to start inputting the password without waiting for a long time.

  Further, when it is determined that a card with a balance is inserted when the state where the special symbol is stopped exceeds a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds), the return button 42 is displayed. Since it is set to be forcibly invalidated, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to return the card and the card being stolen. In addition, when a card with a balance is not inserted, a standby display is displayed in which a normal title screen is displayed. Can be done against.

  In addition, when the card is returned by operating the return button 42 within a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds) after the special symbol is stopped with the balance card inserted, Since the two-dimensional code is displayed on the three-symbol display device 81 (a gaming privilege is given), the player operates the return button 42 within that time to finish the gaming bonus when the game is finished. I can try to get it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to return the card and returning home. In the present embodiment, a two-dimensional code is displayed as a gaming privilege. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific effect (for example, information on the pachinko machine 10 scheduled to be released in the future) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Etc.) may be displayed, or a number of prize balls may be provided.

  Next, a command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1311). This command determination processing (S1311) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1501). When the variation pattern command is received (S1501: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1502), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1503). Return to the main process. The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 29) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1501: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1504). When the stop type command is received (S1504: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1505), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1506). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 29) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1504: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1507). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1507: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). Is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1508). In the processing of S1508, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1508 is completed, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number-of-holding balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, the starting win is received. Is detected, or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110 by the processing of S1508. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1508 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1507, when the pending ball number command has not been received (S1507: No), it is next determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1509). Then, when a winning information command is received (S1509: Yes), the winning / failing determination result indicated by the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding area of the winning information storage area 223a (S1510). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the main controller 110 acquires the values of the counters C1 to C3, and the acquired counters. Each value of C1 to C3 is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Moreover, as soon as each value of each counter C1-C3 is acquired in the main controller 110, the original lottery is obtained from each acquired value of each counter C1-C3 separately from the original special symbol jackpot lottery. Various kinds of information obtained when the above is performed is prefetched (predicted). When the main control device 110 finishes prefetching, a winning information command including various information obtained by prefetching (whether, stop type, variation pattern) is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  If the winning information command is not received in the processing of S1509 (S1509: No), it is next determined whether or not the card information command is received from the main control device 110 (S1511). When the card information command is received (S1511: Yes), the card balance information is stored in the slave card information storage area 223e based on the received card information command (S1512). On the other hand, if it is determined that a card information command has not been received (S1511: No), it is determined whether another command has been received, and processing corresponding to the received command is executed (S1513). ), The process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the variable display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1312). This variable display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S1312), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1601). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1601: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1615. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1601: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1602), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S1503 of the command determination process (see FIG. 28). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1603).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1604). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1605). In the process of S1605, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1606.

  In the processing of S1606, it is determined whether the set display variation pattern command is a variation pattern command that is a big hit (S1606). If it is determined that the change pattern command is a deviation (S1606: No), the card return effect flag 223k is set to OFF (S1607). Thereafter, a pending change process is executed (S1608). The hold change process (S1608) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 30, but when the card return button 42 is operated when a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300, the change start is started. A process of changing the color and notifying the result of the determination as to whether or not the suspension is a hit is executed. After the pending change process (S1608), the process of S1615 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the set display variation pattern command is a variation pattern command that is a big hit (S1606: Yes), is a card with a balance inserted in the card reading unit 300? It is determined (S1609). When it is determined that a card with a balance is not inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1609: No), the processing of S1615 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1609: Yes), it is determined whether the return lock flag 223f is set to ON (S1610). When it is determined that the return lock flag 223f is off (S1610: No), the process of S1615 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the return lock flag 223f is on (S1610: Yes), the value of the lottery counter 223j is acquired (S1611). It is determined whether the acquired value of the lottery counter 223j is any one of “0-4” which is a winning value (S1612).

  If it is determined that the value of the acquired lottery counter 223j is out of place (S1612: No), the process of S1615 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the acquired lottery counter 223j is a win (S1612: Yes), the return variation display mode is changed to the variation pattern set in S1604 on the third symbol display device 81 and displayed. Is set to ON (S1613). A display card return effect command is generated (set) overwriting the display variation pattern command set in S1604.

  It is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1615). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1615: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1615: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1616), and then in the process of S1506 of the command determination process (see FIG. 28), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1617). Next, the stop type acquired in the process of S1617 is set as a display stop type command (S1618).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the hold change process (S1608) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the hold change process (S1608). This hold change process (S1608) is executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the card reading unit 300 has a balance. When the return button 42 is operated when the return button 42 is operated, if there is a big hit at the start of fluctuation, a process of displaying the result of the determination on the success / failure for the player by changing the display color of the hold is executed.

  In the hold change process (S1608), first, it is determined whether a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (that is, whether the value stored in the slave card information storage area 223e is greater than 0) ( S1621). If it is determined that a card with a balance is not inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1621: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1621: Yes), the value of the special reserved ball number counter 223b is 1 or more (that is, the special symbol is reserved). Is stored) (S1622). If it is determined that the special symbol hold is 0 (S1622: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol hold is stored (S1622: Yes), it is determined whether the subordinate return button flag 223i is on (S1623). If it is determined that the sub return button flag 223i is off (S1623: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the secondary return button flag 223i is on (S1623: Yes), it is determined whether there is a winning hold among the pending winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. (S1624).

  If it is determined that all the suspensions have been released (S1624: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning hold is stored in the hold (S1624: Yes), it is displayed in a display color (in this embodiment, red) indicating to the player that the hold is a big win. A pending change command is generated (S1625).

  In this way, when the special symbol is a variation pattern that is a big hit of the special symbol, the return variation display mode is replaced with the variation pattern set by the main controller 110 by lottery when the third symbol display device 81 is variably displayed. Since the return variation display mode is displayed, the player can be informed that a big hit will be made at an early stage. Further, as shown in FIG. 4 (b), the return fluctuation display mode is based on the fact that the player is notified during the fluctuation of the special symbol so that the card return button 42 is operated and the return button 42 is operated. Since the effect of notifying the player that the game will be a big hit (early notification) is executed early, the player can return the card from the card reading unit 300 by operating the return button 42 at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to return the card. Furthermore, since the return variation display mode is a variation pattern that is a big hit, it often takes a while before the ball lending operation is required, so the ball lending operation is not performed for a long time, Forgetting to return the card can be prevented by forgetting that the remaining card is still inserted in the card reading unit 300.

  In addition, even when the variation pattern is not a big hit, the player can enjoy the return button 42 by operating the return button 42 so as to notify the result of the pending pre-reading, which is a gaming privilege. 42 can be operated, and the return button 42 can always be conscious. Therefore, the malfunction which forgets card return can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, when the timing of operating the return button 42 coincides with the timing of the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, it is configured to notify the hold prefetching, so that the hold prefetching result can be easily notified. However, it is configured so that the player can enjoy the operation at the same time, but not limited to that, the read-ahead is based on the operation at any timing. You may comprise so that the result of this may be alert | reported. Further, the present invention is not limited to the result of prefetching, and may be configured to notify the determined variation pattern type (reach, super reach, etc.), or may be configured to display a specific character. However, it may be configured such that game points (privileges such as increasing the number of characters displayed by accumulating points) are given to the player.

  Next, the card effect control process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the card effect control process (S1313). This card effect control process (S1313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is controlled to forcibly eject the card at the start of the jackpot. Or the return button 42 executes processing for determining whether or not the card with the balance is operated in a state where the card is inserted in the card reading unit 300.

  In the card effect control process (S1313), first, it is determined whether a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (that is, whether a balance greater than 0 is stored in the slave card information storage area 223e) (S1701). ). If it is determined that a card with a balance is not inserted (S1701: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a card with a balance has been inserted into the card reading unit 300 (S1701: Yes), whether an opening command indicating the start of jackpot is received from the main controller 110 (that is, jackpot It is determined whether or not the game is started (S1702). If it is determined that the opening command is received (S1702: Yes), it is determined whether the return lock flag 223f is set to ON (S1703). If it is determined that the return lock flag 223f is on (S1703: Yes), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the return lock flag 223f is off (S1703: No), a card discharge signal for setting the card return to the card reading unit 300 is set. As shown in FIG. 13, this card ejection signal is a signal that activates the signal directly to the card reading unit 300 side rather than the return extraction means 42a, and is the same as when the return button 42 is operated. Let it be in a state.

  The slave card information storage area 223e is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S1705). A card discharge notification sound command for outputting a sound “Card is returned. Please accept” is set in the sound output device 226. A display card discharge notification command for displaying the characters “card is returned. Please remember to receive it!” Is set on the third symbol display device 81 (S1707).

  Thus, when the jackpot game is started, the card is forcibly returned in the state where the return button 42 is activated, so that the player does not have to operate the return button 42. Cards can be collected. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time and effort of the player. In addition, because the opportunity to be returned forcibly was the start of the jackpot game, the need for ball lending continued for a while, so the player forgot to return the card and returned home Can be prevented. Also, since the card will be forcibly returned at the timing when the need for ball lending will disappear for a while, it will be necessary to lend the ball immediately after the card has been forcibly returned, and you will have to insert the card again. It can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1702: No), it is determined whether the return button 42 has been operated (pressed) (S1708). If it is determined that the return button 42 has been operated (S1708: Yes), the subordinate return button flag 223i is set to ON (S1709). On the other hand, when it is determined that the return button 42 is not operated (S1708: No), the sub return button flag 223i is set to OFF (S1710).

  Next, the card notification process (S1314) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the card notification process (S1314). This card notification process (S1314) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and based on the card information inserted in the card reading unit 300, The process which alert | reports card information to the 3 symbol display apparatus 81 is performed. In addition, when it is detected that a game is not being executed, if a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300, the card with a balance remains inserted in the card reading unit 300. The notification process is executed.

  In the card notification process (S1314), it is first determined whether the card balance stored in the slave card information storage area 223e is greater than 0 (that is, there is a card balance) (S1801). If it is determined that there is no card balance (including a case where no card is inserted) (S1801: No), insertion notification lamp turn-off data for turning off the insertion notification lamp 40a is set (S1802).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a card balance (S1801: Yes), the insertion notification lamp 40a for notifying that the card provided on the front frame 14 is inserted in the card reading unit 300 is inserted. Notification lamp lighting data is set (S1803). It is determined whether the card balance stored in the slave card information storage area 223e is 3000 yen or more (S1804). If it is determined that the card balance is equal to or greater than 3000 yen (S1804: Yes), a voice notification command for causing the voice output device 226 to output a voice “Card is in” is set (S1805). A high-priced notification command for display is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in red characters to alternately display the characters "Card is in !!!!" and "Card balance is XX yen." (S1806). Note that the amount of XX is displayed according to the card balance.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the card balance is less than 3000 yen (S1804: No), white letters “Card is in!” And “Card balance is XX yen” are displayed. A display small amount notification command to be alternately displayed at a cycle of 30 seconds is set (S1807). Note that the amount of XX is displayed according to the card balance.

  By configuring in this way, while the card balance is high, the player can always be aware of the fact that the card is inserted with voice and conspicuous characters, so a high balance It is possible to prevent a player from forgetting a certain card and causing damage such as theft. In addition, when the card balance is small, it is displayed in a relatively inconspicuous character color and is not notified by voice, so that the player is always notified by voice and conspicuous characters. You can prevent problems that can not be concentrated in the game.

  In this embodiment, the card balance is determined to be high when it is 3000 yen or more. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the amount may be set as appropriate. Moreover, it may be configured to be provided on the money amount setting button and the front frame 14 so that a threshold amount for changing the notification can be set by a player's operation. Moreover, you may comprise so that alerting | reporting may be prohibited by selection of a player. By configuring in this way, the player can change the setting, and the game can be performed in a state according to the player's preference.

  Although the color of the notification character is white, it is not limited to this, and it may be a translucent character color. A character appearing in a reach or the like may be displayed on the card reading unit 300 in the card reading unit 300 according to clothes color or production. You may comprise so that it may alert | report that a certain card | curd is inserted.

  It is determined whether the handle sensor 510 is off (S1808). If it is determined that the handle sensor is off (S1808: Yes), the handle counter 223g is incremented by 1 and updated (S1809). It is determined whether the updated value of the handle counter 223g is equal to or greater than a set value (15 seconds in the present embodiment) (S1810). Here, the handle counter 223g is updated when the handle sensor 510 is turned off every predetermined cycle, so that the value of the handle counter 223g can be converted into time from the execution cycle and determined. .

  If it is determined that the value of the handle counter 223g is less than the set value (S1810: No), the process of S1813 is executed. If it is determined that the value of the handle counter 223g is equal to or greater than the set value (S1810: Yes), a card notification sound for outputting a sound of “Peep” from the sound output device 226 and “Forgot to return the card!” A display notification command is set (S1811). On the other hand, if it is determined that the handle sensor 510 is on (S1808), the value of the handle counter 223g is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S1812). Thereafter, the process of S1813 is executed.

  As described above, when the handle sensor 510 remains off for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 15 seconds) or longer, if a card with a card balance remains inserted in the card reading unit 300, the player Since a character for notifying the player to return the card and a notification sound for alerting the player are output, even if the player forgets to return the card, the player can be made aware. In addition, even when the user has already left the seat, the user can be reminded that he / she has forgotten to return the card by listening to the notification sound and can return to the seat again. In addition, when a player returns home without noticing the notification sound, the store clerk can recognize that the card has been forgotten by the notification sound and manage it as a forgotten item at the game store. can do.

  In the process of S1813, it is determined whether the human sensor 400 provided on the front frame 14 is on (that is, there is no player in front of the pachinko machine 10) (S1813). When it is determined that the human sensor 400 is turned on (S1814: Yes), a card notification sound for outputting a voice “Peep” from the sound output device 226 and a display notification “Forgot to return the card!” A command is set (S1814). On the other hand, when it is determined that the human sensor 400 is off (that is, the player is in front of the pachinko machine 10) (S1813: No), the process of S1815 is executed.

  Thus, the presence sensor 400 is determined by the human sensor 400, it is determined that there is no player, and if a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300, the card is inserted. Since the notification prompting the user to return is made, it is possible to notice that the player has forgotten to return as soon as the player forgets to return and stands. Therefore, it can be prevented that the player forgets to return the card and thus suffers damage such as theft of the card.

  In the present embodiment, the notification regarding the card return is immediately performed when the human sensor 400 is turned on. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the human sensor 400 is turned on. Etc.) may be configured to be notified when triggered. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent notification when the human sensor 400 is turned on only for a short time, for example, when the player tilts his / her body a little. Therefore, it is possible to prevent frequent notifications and make the player feel uncomfortable.

  It is determined whether the upper plate sensor 17a and the ball removal button sensor 52a are on (S1815). When it is determined that the upper plate sensor 17a and the ball removal button sensor 52a are turned on (S1815: Yes), the card notification sound for outputting the voice “Peep” from the audio output device 226 and “forgetting to return the card” The display notification command “!” Is set (S1816). On the other hand, if it is determined that the upper plate sensor 17a or the ball removal button sensor 52a is off (S1815: No), this process is terminated.

  The fact that the upper plate sensor 17a is on indicates that there is no game ball on the upper plate 17, and that the ball removal button sensor is on indicates that the ball is being discharged into the dollar box. Therefore, it can be said that the player is about to return after finishing the game. In this case, if a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300, a notification is made to prompt the user to return the card. Thus, the player can notice that the card remains inserted before returning home. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player forgets to return the card and returns home, resulting in damage such as theft.

  Next, the card return effect process (S1315) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the card return effect process (S1315). This card return effect process (S1315) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the return display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, when the return button 42 is operated, a process for displaying a fixed notification effect on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In the card return effect process (S1315), first, it is determined whether a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (that is, whether the balance information stored in the slave card information storage area 223e is greater than 0). (S1901). If it is determined that a card with a balance is not inserted (S1901: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a card with a balance is inserted (S1901: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol is being variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1902). If it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S1902: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol variation display is being performed (S1902: Yes), whether the card return effect flag 223k is on (that is, the return variation display mode is variable display on the third symbol display device 81). Is determined) (S1903). If it is determined that the card return effect flag 223k is off (S1903: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the card return effect flag 223k is on (S1903: Yes), it is determined whether the sub return button flag 223i is set to on (S1904).

  When it is determined that the sub return button flag 223i is off (S1904: No), a special symbol display mode for notifying the third symbol display device 81 of a big hit (see the lower diagram in FIG. 4B) Set the display confirmation notification command to be displayed.

  In this way, when the return variation display mode is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player operates the return button 42 according to the notification content displayed in the return variation display mode, A jackpot is announced. Therefore, the player can always play the game while thinking that the variation of the special symbol is started in the return variation display mode, and can be aware that the return button 42 is operated. In addition, since the jackpot is notified by operating the return button 42 based on the display of the return variation display mode, even after returning the card, until a ball lending is necessary for a while. Since there is time, the player can manage the card by closing it. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk of forgetting to return the card and causing damage such as theft. Moreover, the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be switched by operating the return button 42, and the function of the return button 42 can be increased besides returning a card.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the password input process (S1316) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the password input process (S1316). This password input process (S1316) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and a password for setting the return button 42 to be enabled or disabled is set. Executes processing related to input and setting.

  In the password input process (S1316), first, it is determined whether the password input screen (see FIG. 5B) or the password setting screen (FIG. 5A) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2000). ). When it is determined that the password input screen or the password setting screen is displayed (S2000: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated. If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S2001: Yes), it is determined whether any button other than the enter button 22a has been operated (S2003).

  If it is determined that a button other than the enter button 22a has been operated (S2003), it is determined whether the up button 22b has been operated (S2004). When it is determined that the up button 22b has been operated (S2004: Yes), the number specified background of the digit specified by the cursor displayed on the password input screen or the password setting screen is displayed one up. An upward command is set (S2005).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a button other than the up button 22b has been operated (S2004: No), it is determined whether the down button 22d has been operated (S2006). When it is determined that the down button 22d has been operated (S2006: Yes), the number specified background of the digit specified by the cursor displayed on the password input screen or the password setting screen is lowered by one. A downward command is set (S2007). On the other hand, if it is determined that a button other than the down button 22d has been operated (S2006: No), it is determined whether the right button 22e has been operated (S2008).

  When it is determined that the right button 22e has been operated (S2008: Yes), the cursor displayed on the password input screen or the password setting screen is moved to the next digit to the right of the digit where the cursor is displayed. The right command for display to be set is set (S2009). On the other hand, if it is determined that a button other than the right button 22e has been operated (S2008: No), it is determined that the left button 22c has been operated, and the cursor is displayed on the password input screen or the password setting screen. A display left direction command is set to move to the next left digit of the displayed digit (S2010).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the enter button 22a has been operated (S2003: No), password processing is executed (S2002). The password processing (S2002) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 35. On the password setting screen or the password input screen, a password is set for the set or input password, and the return button 42 is pressed. If the password is invalidated or the input password is compared with the set password, and if they match, processing for enabling the return button 42 is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, password processing (S2002) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this password processing (S2002). This password process (S2002) is executed in the password input process (FIG. 26, S1316) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and the password for setting the return button 42 to be enabled or disabled. Execute processing related to input and setting.

  In the password processing (S2002), first, it is determined whether or not the displayed screen is a password setting screen for newly setting a password (that is, whether or not a password is set in the password storage area 223h). S2021). If it is determined that the displayed password setting screen is displayed (S2021: Yes), it is determined whether the input password is a normal password (S2022). Here, a normal password is considered to be a case where a number that is not actually mixed due to noise or the like (in this embodiment, a number other than 1 to 5) or a password whose number of digits is insufficient. It is done.

  If it is determined that the password is normal (S2022: Yes), the input password is stored (set) in the password storage area 223h (S2023). A return button invalid signal is generated (S2024). The return lock flag 223f is set to ON (S2025). Here, the return button invalid signal is a signal that inactivates the photo MOS relay of the changeover switch 42b (a state in which the diode is extinguished) in the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the signal line connecting the return button 42 and the card reading unit 300 is configured to be cut and switched to the connected state, so that the return button 42 is set to be enabled or disabled. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and the return button 42 may be mechanically fixed so that the return button 42 cannot be operated (pressed) from the back side by a solenoid or the like. With this configuration, the return button 42 can be invalidated more easily.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the input password is abnormal (S2022: No), a display error command for displaying the characters "Please enter the password again" on the third symbol display device 81 is set. (S2026).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the password input screen is displayed (that is, the password is stored in the password storage area 223h) (S2021: No), the password input this time is the password. It is determined whether or not the passwords stored in the storage area 223h match (S2027). If it is determined that the passwords match as a result of the verification (S2027: Yes), a return button valid signal is set (set). Here, the return button valid signal is set so that the photo MOS relay as the changeover switch 42b is set to active, the diode of the photo MOS relay is turned on, and the signal line between the return button 42 and the card reading unit 300 is connected. It is a signal set to the state. The password storage area 223h is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S2029). The return lock flag 223f is set to OFF (S2030). On the other hand, if it is determined that the entered password and the password stored in the password storage area 223h do not match (S2027: No), the characters “password does not match” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display mismatch error command to be displayed is set.

  Thus, the return button 42 is invalidated by setting the password, and the return button 42 is validated by inputting the same password as the set password in the state where the password is set. (Cancellation is invalidated) If the return button 42 is invalidated, even if you forget to operate the return button 42 and leave your seat, the card will be returned to others. Can be prevented from being stolen. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with a card with a balance inserted in peace.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the break process (S1317) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this break process (S1317). This break process (S1317) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the player operates the break button 500 arranged on the front frame 14. Thus, processing for setting invalidation of the return button 42 is executed.

  In the break process (S1317), first, it is determined whether a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S2101). If it is determined that a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S2101: Yes), it is determined whether the break button 500 has been operated (pressed) (S2102). If it is determined that the break button 42 has been operated (S2102: Yes), it is determined whether a password is stored in the password storage area 223h (S2103). When it is determined that a password is stored in the password storage area 223h (S2103: Yes), a display password input command for displaying a password input screen on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the password is not stored in the password storage area 223h (S2103: No), a display password setting command for displaying the password setting screen on the third symbol display device 81 is set ( S2105). On the other hand, when it is determined that a card with a balance is not inserted (S2101: No), or when the break button 500 is not operated (S2102: No), this process ends.

  As described above, when the password is set and the return button 42 is not invalidated by operating the break button 500, the process of displaying the password setting screen is executed in the process of waiting for the customer effect (S1305). It is possible to display the password screen, set the password, and invalidate the return button 42 without waiting until the password is displayed.

  Further, when the password is set by operating the break button 500, the password input screen is displayed. Therefore, when the return button 42 is rushed and activated, the break button 500 is displayed. The password input screen can be displayed immediately and the return button 42 can be activated by operating. Therefore, the player can perform without waiting for the input of the password, and the time can be used effectively.

  In this embodiment, the password setting screen is displayed by operating the break button 500. However, by operating the break button 500, the return button 42 is forcibly invalidated, and a pachinko machine is displayed. You may comprise so that the release switch etc. which validate the setting which invalidated the return button 42 with the break button 500 may be provided in the back side of the apparatus 10. FIG. In this way, if the break button 500 is operated, the player can take a break immediately and the convenience is enhanced. In addition, when the user wants to release the return button 42 after finishing the break, the setting can be canceled by calling a store clerk of the amusement store, and the security can be improved.

  In addition, by pressing the break button 500, the ball lending button 43 may be invalidated, or it may be set so as to prohibit the launch of the game ball. You may comprise so that it may display on the apparatus 81. FIG. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress damage that is illegally played by other players during the break or that the game ball is stolen by operating the ball lending button 43.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the case has been described in which the return button 42 is set with a password to perform invalidation and validation switching.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the shutter member 710 capable of covering the front side of the return button 42 and the ball lending button 43 is disposed, and the shutter member is set by setting a password. 710 is locked and unlocked.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the following points. The second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that a shutter member 710 is arranged and the locking and unlocking is performed by a password.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 37 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, a shutter button 700 and a shutter member 710 are added to the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Although details will be described later, the shutter button 700 is an operation button for displaying an input or setting screen for inputting or setting a password for locking or unlocking the slide of the shutter member 710.

  The shutter member 710 is made of a thin metal plate, slides to the left and right, and closes to cover the front side of the return button 42 and the ball lending button 43 and opens to be housed inside the front frame 14. It is configured to be movable. FIG. 38 is a view showing the shutter member 710 and the movable portion of the shutter member 710. FIG. 38A is a diagram showing a state where the shutter member 710 is moved to the closed position, and FIG. 38B is a diagram showing a state where the shutter member 710 is moved to the open position. As shown in FIG. 38A, an operation knob 710a is formed on the front side (the front side of the gaming machine) of the shutter member 710 so as to project the front side so that the player can slide the shutter member 710. ing. Although not shown, the front frame 14 is formed with a rail portion that slidably holds the shutter member 710, and is held by inserting the shutter member 710 into the rail portion. It is configured as follows.

  As a configuration for fixing (locking) the shutter member 710 in the closed position, a lock motor 900 and an L-shaped locking regulating member 900 a that rotates in accordance with the rotation of the lock motor 900 are provided. The lock motor 900 is rotated 90 degrees in the forward and reverse directions, so that the L-shaped piece of the locking regulating member 900a contacts one side of the open position side of the shutter member 710 and moves from the closed position to the open position. It is moved to a position where it is restricted and a position where it is retracted downward so that the locking restriction member 900a does not come into contact with the shutter member 710 even if the shutter member 710 slides.

  A lock sensor 910 for detecting the position of the lock regulating member 900a is provided. The lock sensor 910 is configured by a reflective optical sensor, and is configured to detect the lock regulating member 900a by reflected light. As shown in FIG. 38A, the lock sensor 910 is disposed at a position where the lock regulating member 900a is not detected when the lock regulating member 900a regulates the sliding of the shutter member 710. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38 (b), the locking regulating member 900a is disposed at a position where the locking regulating member 710 is detected at a position where the locking regulating member 900a is retracted to a position where the sliding of the shutter member 710 is not regulated. That is, when the lock sensor 910 does not detect the lock regulating member 900a (the lock sensor 910 is off), it is detected that the shutter member 710 is fixed, and the lock sensor 910 detects the lock regulating member 710. Is detected (the lock sensor 910 is on), the shutter member 710 is detected to be in a released state (slidable state).

  In the present embodiment, the shutter member 710 is configured to be fixed or released with the configuration shown in FIG. 38. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration is such that the regulating piece is projected and fixed by a solenoid or the like. Alternatively, the sliding operation of the shutter member 710 may be restricted by a powerful electromagnet or the like.

  With reference to FIG. 39, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 39 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. The block diagram of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is different from the block diagram of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the shutter button 700 and the lock motor 900 are connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. A lock sensor 910 has been added.

  The shutter button 700 is composed of a push-down switch, and is disposed on the right side of the ball lending button 43 on the front frame 14 so as to protrude to the front side. When the shutter button 700 is pressed, an electrical signal is output to the input / output port 113 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  The lock motor 900 is configured by a stepping motor for rotating the lock regulating member 900 a and is controlled to rotate based on a signal from the sound lamp control device 113. The lock sensor 910 is configured by a reflective optical sensor for detecting the lock regulating member 900a.

  A shutter password storage area 223p is added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. The shutter password storage area 223p stores an input password (see FIG. 43, S1373) in shutter processing (FIG. 43, S1370) executed by the MPU 113 of the sound lamp control device 113, which will be described later. When the shutter member 710 is fixed (when a password is stored in the shutter password storage area 223p), whether the input password matches the password stored in the shutter password storage area 223p. When collation is executed, data in the shutter password storage area 223p is used.

  With reference to FIG. 40, the main process (S1300) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the main process (S1300). The main processing (FIG. 40, S1300) of the second embodiment is different from the main processing (FIG. 26, S1300) of the first embodiment in shutter input processing (FIG. 41, S1340) and shutter setting processing (FIG. 42, S1350). ) And have been added. Details of the shutter input process (FIG. 41, S1340) and the shutter setting process (FIG. 42, S1350) will be described later. The processes in S1301 to S1322 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes in S1301 to S1322 in the first embodiment. When the processing of S1316 is completed, shutter input processing (FIG. 40, S1300) is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 41, the shutter input process (S1340) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 40, S1300) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this shutter input processing (S1340). The shutter input process (S1340 in FIG. 41) is a process for executing a process for displaying an input screen for inputting or setting a password for locking or unlocking the slide of the shutter member 710.

  In the shutter input process (FIG. 41, S1340), first, it is determined whether the shutter 700 has been operated (pressed) (S1341). If it is determined that the shutter button 700 has been operated (S1341: Yes), it is determined whether a password is stored in the shutter password storage area 223p (S1342). If it is determined that the password is stored in the shutter password storage area 223p (S1342: Yes), a display shutter input command is generated (set). This display shutter input command is a command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the same display as in FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that no password is stored in the shutter password storage area 223p (S1342: No), a display shutter setting command is generated (set) (S1344). This display shutter setting command is a command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the same display as in FIG. If it is determined that the shutter button 700 has not been operated (S1341: No), this process ends.

  In this way, when the player operates the shutter button 700, either the password input screen or the password setting screen is automatically set according to the state of the shutter member 710 at that time. Therefore, the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the shutter setting process (S1350) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 40, S1300) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. . FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the shutter setting process (S1350). In the shutter setting process (FIG. 42, S1350), the password input screen or the cursor on the setting screen is moved based on the operation of the frame button 22, and the shutter member 710 is set based on the password being set or input. This is a process for executing the lock or unlock.

  In the shutter setting process (FIG. 42, S1350), first, is the shutter password input screen (see FIG. 5B) or the shutter password setting screen (FIG. 5A) displayed on the third symbol display device 81? It is determined (S1351). If it is determined that the shutter password input screen or shutter password setting screen is displayed (S1352: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (S1352). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S1352: Yes), it is determined whether any button other than the enter button 22a has been operated (S1353).

  If it is determined that a button other than the enter button 22a has been operated (S1353: Yes), it is determined whether the up button 22b has been operated (S1354). If it is determined that the up button 22b has been operated (S1354: Yes), the number designation background of the digit designated by the cursor displayed on the shutter password input screen or the shutter password setting screen is displayed one up. The display up direction command to be raised is set (S1355).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a button other than the up button 22b has been operated (S1354: No), it is determined whether the down button 22d has been operated (S1356). When it is determined that the down button 22d has been operated (S1356: Yes), the digit designation background of the digit designated by the cursor displayed on the shutter password input screen or the shutter password setting screen is lowered by one. A display downward command is set (S1357). On the other hand, if it is determined that a button other than the down button 22d has been operated (S1356: No), it is determined whether the right button 22e has been operated (S1358).

  If it is determined that the right button 22e has been operated (S1358: Yes), the cursor displayed on the password input screen or the password setting screen is moved to the next digit to the right of the digit where the cursor is displayed. The display right direction command to be set is set (S1359). On the other hand, if it is determined that a button other than the right button 22e has been operated (S1358: No), it is determined that the left button 22c has been operated, and the cursor displayed on the shutter password input screen or the shutter password setting screen is displayed. A display left direction command for moving the cursor to the next digit to the left of the displayed digit is set (S1360).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the enter button 22a has been operated (S1353: No), shutter processing is executed (S1370). The shutter process (S1370) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 43, but a password is set for the password set or input on the shutter password setting screen or the shutter password input screen, and the shutter member is set. A process of unlocking the shutter member 710 is executed if the 710 is locked (fixed) in the closed position, or the input password is compared with the set password, and if they match, the shutter member 710 is unlocked.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the shutter process (S1370) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this shutter processing (S1370). This shutter process (S1370) is executed in the shutter setting process (FIG. 42, S1350) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and executes a process for locking or unlocking the shutter member 710. To do.

  In the shutter processing (S1370), first, it is determined whether or not the displayed screen is a shutter password setting screen for setting a new password (that is, whether or not a password is set in the shutter password storage area 223p). (S1371). When it is determined that the shutter password setting screen is displayed (S1371: Yes), it is determined whether the input password is a normal password (S1372). Here, a normal password is considered to be a case where a number that is not actually mixed due to noise or the like (in this embodiment, a number other than 1 to 5) or a password whose number of digits is insufficient. It is done.

  If it is determined that the password is normal (S1372: Yes), the input password is stored (set) in the shutter password storage area 223p (S1373). A signal for operating the lock motor 900 to the closed position (in this embodiment, a position rotated 90 degrees to the right from the open position) is set (S1374).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the input password is abnormal (S1372: No), a display error command for displaying the characters "Please enter the password again" on the third symbol display device 81 is set. (S1375).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the shutter password input screen is displayed (that is, the password is stored in the shutter password storage area 223p) (S1371: No), the password input this time Whether the password stored in the shutter password storage area 223p matches is determined (S1376). If it is determined that the passwords match as a result of the verification (S1376: Yes), a signal for moving the lock restricting member 900a to the release position where the lock motor 900 unlocks the shutter member 710 is set (this book) In the embodiment, the position rotated 90 degrees rightward from the lock position) (S1377). The shutter password storage area 223p is reset to an initial value (0 in this embodiment) (S1378).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the entered password and the password stored in the shutter password storage area 223p do not match (S1376: No), the characters “password does not match” appear on the third symbol display device 81. The display mismatch error command for displaying is set (S1379).

  Thus, the password is set so that the shutter member 710 can be locked in the closed position. Accordingly, the player can lock the shutter member 710 by sliding the shutter member 710 to the closed position and then setting the password on the shutter password setting screen to prohibit the sliding of the shutter member 710. On the other hand, when the shutter button 700 is operated with the shutter member 710 locked, the shutter password input screen is displayed and the same password set on the shutter password setting screen is input. The lock of the shutter member 710 can be released. Therefore, the shutter member 710 can be locked or unlocked with an easy operation. Also, since the password is reset once unlocked, the password set by the previous player does not remain even if the player changes, and the password can be used without being confused. Can be locked or unlocked.

  In the present embodiment, once the shutter member 710 is locked with a password, the lock is maintained until the set password is input or the initialization process of the RAM 223 is executed. Not limited to this, the configuration may be such that the lock is automatically released when a predetermined time elapses, and when the predetermined time elapses, the locked state is indicated by the third symbol display device 81 or the audio output device 226. You may comprise so that it may alert | report. With such a configuration, even when the shutter member 710 is left in a locked state, it is automatically canceled or notified when a predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) elapses. Thus, the normal state can be restored by initial processing of the RAM 223 or the like by the store clerk of the game store.

  In the present embodiment, the shutter member 710 is configured to be slid by the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the shutter member 710 is automatically moved to the closed position when a password is set or the shutter button is pressed. You may comprise. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a problem of forgetting to slide the shutter member 710 to the closed position and setting a password. Further, by operating the shutter button 700, the shutter member 710 may be automatically locked without requiring a password or the like. In such a case, the lock may be released by calling a store clerk or performing lock release by fingerprint authentication or the like.

  In the present embodiment, both the return button 42 and the ball lending button 43 are covered with the shutter member 710. However, only the return button 42 or only the ball lending button 43 may be covered. Good. Alternatively, the return button 42 and the ball lending button 43 may be provided with dedicated shutters so that they can be locked individually.

  In the present embodiment, a password is used to lock the shutter member 710. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Fingerprint authentication or voice recognition may be used, and the pachinko machine 10 side forcibly issues a password or a two-dimensional code. Then, the player may be configured to take and manage it with a memo or a mobile phone or the like, or the pachinko machine 10 may issue a dedicated IC card or the like. With this configuration, there is no problem that the player forgets the password, and the return button 42 and the ball lending button 43 can be easily locked.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the card reading unit 300 extracts the signals for turning on the respective segments of the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c of the balance indicator 41, whereby the balance information of the card inserted into the card reading unit 300 is extracted. It was configured to discriminate. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the respective light amounts of the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c of the balance indicator 41 are detected, and the balance displayed on the balance indicator 41 based on the detected light amount. It is different in that it is configured to detect information. Other configurations are the same.

  As a configuration for detecting the light amount of each LED of the balance indicator 41, a light detection sensor capable of detecting a minimum light amount is arranged on each balance LED on the balance display surface of the balance indicator 41. In addition, a light detection sensor capable of detecting the amount of light on the wall portion by providing a wall portion standing partially or all around the balance display surface on which the balance of the balance display 41 is displayed is not limited thereto. You may arrange | position toward each LED. Further, the substrate on which each LED is arranged may be configured by a transmissive substrate, and a light detection sensor for detecting the light amount of each LED may be provided on the back side of the substrate.

  In addition, the light detection sensor is configured to be provided for each LED, but is not limited thereto, and may be configured to be provided for each segment of the LED. By configuring in this way, it is possible to detect the balance display that is lit and displayed on the balance display 41 more accurately. Moreover, you may arrange | position a light detection sensor so that the total light quantity which the 1st LED41a, 2nd LED41b, and 3rd LED41c light may be detected. With this configuration, the number of light detection sensors can be reduced, and the number of wirings and the like can be reduced.

  The main control device 110 receives the light amount detected by the light detection sensor as a light amount signal via the payout control device 111. Based on the received light quantity signal, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 determines display information data corresponding to the light quantity indicated by the light quantity signal. This determination method is performed by setting a display information correspondence table in which display information is stored in association with each light quantity combination detected by each light detection sensor in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. The display information corresponding to the light quantity is selected from the display information correspondence table to determine the card balance.

  With this configuration, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can identify the display information displayed on the balance display device 41 without electrically connecting the balance display device 41 and the main control device 110. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized signal from being transmitted from the card reading unit 300 to the main controller 110. It is also possible to prevent an illegal signal from being sent from the pachinko machine 10 side to the card reading unit 300.

  In the present embodiment, the light detection sensor that detects the amount of light is used. However, the balance information is acquired using an imaging unit that recognizes the balance display displayed on the balance display 41. You may comprise. In such a case, in order to prevent the player from visually recognizing the display on the balance indicator 41, the display is inclined obliquely to a position that does not overlap each LED on the facing side of the board on which each LED is arranged. A mirror may be provided so that the balance display reflected on the mirror is imaged (captured) from each LED substrate side. Further, each LED of the balance indicator 41 may be arranged on a transparent substrate so that the balance display is imaged (captured) from the back side of each LED substrate.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the card balance inserted in the card reading unit 300 is determined and the balance is notified by the pachinko machine 10 has been described. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, there is provided an investment amount storage area for storing the decrease amount of the card balance stored in the card information storage area 223e according to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 as the total investment amount, The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that control for giving game history information and the like to the player is performed based on the value of the investment amount storage area. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  First, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. When the determination button 22a of the frame button 22 of the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 is operated on the standby screen, a menu screen is displayed, and a screen for inputting a password for managing game history information can be selected. This password is issued based on the player's information stored in the server by storing the player's information in the server when the player registers as a member on a specific homepage using a mobile phone or the like. Password.

  Information stored in the server includes the number of jackpots, a specific reach, a specific gaming state (such as the number of times the probability variation has continued and the number of times the premier character has been displayed on the third symbol display device 81), the total investment amount, The total number of game balls that have been issued, the amount of investment and the balance based on the game balls that have been paid out, and the total number of points awarded in the game are stored.

  Depending on the information stored in the server, the benefits obtained on the homepage accessed by the player may change, or the password may be entered into the gaming machine to change the mode (voice, music, type of character displayed, etc.) ) Will change. Specifically, when the predetermined number of jackpots is reached, the wallpaper displayed on the mobile phone standby screen, the ringtone of the mobile phone, etc. that could not be obtained before can be downloaded, Characters, images, music, and the like displayed on the symbol display device 81 are performed in a different manner from usual.

  When the password issued on the member-only screen of the homepage is input to the pachinko machine 10, various information stored in the server can be discriminated by the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, a corresponding password is set in advance for information stored in the server, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 reads the corresponding data from the ROM 223 when the password is input. To be set. When a game is played, various information in the game (such as the number of jackpots, a specific reach, and a specific game state (such as the number of times the probability variation has continued and the number of times the premier character has been displayed on the third symbol display device 81) is read with a password The data is added or updated and stored.

  When the player finishes the game, he / she operates the enter button 22a of the frame button 22 to display the menu screen and select to issue a two-dimensional code, thereby updating various information ( A process for generating a two-dimensional code is executed based on the number of jackpots, a specific reach, or a specific gaming state (such as the number of consecutive times of probability variation or the number of times a premier character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81). The generated two-dimensional code is displayed on the symbol display device 81. The player takes in the two-dimensional code by using the camera function of the mobile phone and accesses the member-dedicated page on the home page indicated by the two-dimensional code. Thus, various information newly updated in the game played this time is stored in the server.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 can identify the total investment amount of the player and the balance of payment so far, so that the variation pattern of the selected special symbol is changed based on the investment amount and the balance of payment. Is done. Specifically, for a player with a large investment amount, when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol that is a big hit, a premium with a low probability of being selected during normal times (when the investment amount is small) The reach selection probability is set high. This makes it easy for premium players to select premium reach for players with a large investment amount, that is, players with a long game time, and see all types of variation patterns of special symbols set in the pachinko machine 10. It is easy to be configured.

  In addition, in the case of a big hit, the balance information can be confirmed by displaying the balance information on the third symbol display device 81. If the probability variation state continues several times in succession, the balance becomes positive. Can be confirmed. Therefore, a player can play a game with a goal, and when the goal is achieved, the joy can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  Further, in order to detect the launch of the game ball, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 measures the time during which the handle sensor 510 is on. In this embodiment, since 100 game balls are fired per minute, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 calculates the number of shots based on the measured time. In addition, in order not to include in the measurement time the case where the handle sensor 510 is turned on even though the game ball has not been fired, the handle sensor 510 is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 10 Second), when the game ball does not pass through the second entrance 67, the number of shots can be calculated more accurately by stopping the measurement. In this case, when a game ball passes through the second entrance 67, measurement may be resumed.

  In this way, by detecting the launch of a game ball, investing whether the game is played with a game ball by lending a ball or whether the game is played with a possession ball obtained by jackpot without lending a ball It can be determined by the time change of the forehead. When it is determined that a game is played with a ball, a notification mode indicating that the return button 42 is operated is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so as to perform a card return operation. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to operate the card return 42 and returning home with the card inserted in the card reading unit 300. Therefore, damage caused by card theft or misuse of card information (such as a ball lending operation without permission) can be suppressed.

  In addition, when playing with this ball, the state of the game so far (after the big hit, the state of the difference between the game ball that has been paid out and the game ball that has been released so far, etc.) ) To determine whether it is possible to play a game with a holding ball, so that it is not possible to play a game with a holding ball (that is, after a big hit, or when the number of difference balls fired is larger) ), The game store side can check the state of the pachinko machine 10 by outputting an error command to the hall computer or the like via an external terminal (not shown). Therefore, even when a game ball is illegally brought in from outside the store and played, the fraud can be detected early. Therefore, damage to the amusement store can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the time during which the game ball is being fired is determined by measuring the time during which the handle sensor 510 is on. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball is fired from the ball launch unit 112a on the game board 13. It may be configured to provide a sensor for detecting a game ball, or may be configured to detect and count the number of game balls supplied to the ball launch unit 112a.

  In addition, you may combine the structure from 1st Embodiment to 4th Embodiment suitably.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the slot machine and the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown.

  External signal receiving means that is provided outside the gaming machine and receives an external signal that is output when an external device that requests the gaming machine to lend gaming media reads valuable value information stored in the storage medium A signal for extracting an external signal output from the external device to the external signal receiving means in a gaming machine having external control means controlled based on the external signal received by the external signal receiving means Extraction means, storage medium determination means for determining whether the external device has read the storage medium based on the external signal extracted by the signal extraction means, and control means for executing main control of the game are the storage medium And a notification means for notifying the player of information related to the storage medium to the player based on a notification signal output based on the determination result of the determination means. Game machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, an external signal that is provided outside the gaming machine and that is output based on the reading of the valuable information stored in the storage medium by an external device that requests the gaming machine to lend gaming media. Is received by the external signal receiving means. The external control means is controlled based on the external signal received by the external signal receiving means. An external signal output from the external device to the external signal receiving means is extracted by the signal extracting means. Based on the external signal extracted by the signal extraction unit, the storage medium determination unit determines whether the external device has read the storage medium. Based on the notification signal output from the determination result of the storage medium determination means by the control means for executing the main control of the game, the information about the storage medium is notified to the player by the notification means. Thus, the player can determine whether there is a storage medium read by the external device based on the information about the storage medium. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player forgets that the external device has read the storage medium. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the damage that the player goes home while reading the storage medium and is stolen for the valuable information stored in the storage medium or the storage medium.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine A1, the display mode based on the valuable value information of the storage medium read by the external device has a valuable display means whose display is controlled by the external device, and the signal extraction means has its valuable display An external display control signal output from the external device for display control of the means; and the storage medium discriminating means based on the external display control signal extracted by the signal extraction means. The information means determines the value information of the storage medium being read, and the informing means informs the player information based on the value information of the storage medium based on the determination result of the storage medium determination means. A gaming machine A2 characterized in that it informs a player.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are produced. That is, the display mode based on the valuable value information of the storage medium read by the external device is controlled by the external device by the valuable display means. An external display control signal output from the external device for display control of the valuable display means is extracted by the signal extraction means. Based on the external display control signal extracted by the signal extraction means, the valuable information of the storage medium read by the external device is determined by the storage medium determination means. Based on the determination result, information based on the valuable value information of the storage medium is notified to the player by the notification means. As a result, it is possible to determine the valuable information displayed on the valuable display means, and to make a notification based on the valuable information. Therefore, more accurate information can be notified about the storage medium read in the external device. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player forgets that the external device has read the storage medium.

  In the gaming machine A1 or gaming machine A2, the value display means is configured to display predetermined information by combining and displaying a plurality of light emitting segments, and the external display control signal is Each of the plurality of light emitting segments is output, and the signal extraction means extracts the display control signal output corresponding to each of the light emitting segments as an external display control signal. The game machine A3 is characterized in that the storage medium discrimination means discriminates valuable value information of the storage medium by combining the extracted external display control signals.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, predetermined information is displayed on the valuable display means by combining and displaying a plurality of light emitting segments. In addition, a display control signal is output for each of the plurality of light emitting segments. Display control signals corresponding to the respective light-emitting segments are extracted by the signal extraction means as external display control signals. By combining the extracted external display control signals, the valuable information of the storage medium is determined by the storage medium determination means. Thereby, the display content displayed by the valuable display means can be accurately determined. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of more accurate information with respect to the valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from forgetting to read the storage medium into the external device.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the signal extraction means includes a light emitting element that emits light when the external signal is input, and a light receiving element that outputs a signal by receiving light emitted from the light emitting element. And a gaming machine A4 characterized by comprising at least.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are achieved. At least signal extraction means is composed of a light emitting element that emits light when an external signal is input and a light receiving element that outputs a signal by receiving light emitted from the light emitting element. Thereby, since the light emitting element cannot be made to emit light from the gaming machine side, it is possible to suppress fraud in which an unauthorized signal is output from the gaming machine side to the external device. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized operation of outputting a lending signal to an external device. Therefore, damage caused by fraud can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the signal extraction means is at least composed of a magnetic field detection means for detecting a magnetic field that changes when the external signal is output. A feature of the gaming machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are achieved. The signal extraction means is at least composed of magnetic field detection means for detecting a magnetic field that changes when an external signal is output. Thereby, since it is not possible to directly output a signal from the gaming machine side to the external device, it is possible to suppress fraud in which an unauthorized signal is output to the external device.

  An external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable information stored in the storage medium, and receives a lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend gaming media based on the read valuable information. In a gaming machine that pays out game media, an operation means having an operation unit that can be operated by a player, and a storage medium read by the external device are returned to the player based on the operation of the operation means. Operation signal output means for outputting a return signal to the external device for executing a return process to be executed or a release process for releasing the reading of the valuable value information of the storage medium, and the operation unit of the operation means are not operated Even in this case, the operation signal output means has a forced return control means for outputting a return signal based on establishment of a predetermined trigger. Game machine B1 which is characterized.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable information stored in the storage medium, and requests the gaming machine to lend gaming media based on the read valuable information. The game medium is paid out based on the rental request signal. Based on the operation of the operation unit having an operation unit that can be operated by the player, the return processing for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player, or reading of the valuable value information of the storage medium is performed. The canceling process for canceling is executed by outputting a return signal to the external device by the operation signal output means. Even when the operation unit of the operation unit is not operated, a return signal is output from the forced return control unit to the operation signal output unit based on establishment of a predetermined trigger. Thereby, the storage medium read in the external device can be returned to the external device or the read valuable value information can be canceled by the control from the gaming machine side. Therefore, if the player forgets the operation of executing the storage medium return process and the valuable value information release process, the damage to the player due to theft of the storage medium and the abuse of the valuable value information can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B1, based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination means for executing the determination of the success / failure of the game, and the display control means for displaying on the display means the identification information that can identify the determination result of the success / failure determination means. When the identification information indicating that the determination result is a win is displayed on the display means, the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game for giving a privilege to the player, and the forced return control means, A gaming machine B2 characterized in that the return signal is output to the operation signal output means on the basis of the determination result of the success / failure determination means.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is executed by the success / failure determination means. Identification information that can identify the determination result is displayed on the display unit by the display control unit. When the identification information indicating that the determination result is a win is displayed on the display means, a privilege game for giving a privilege to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. A return signal is output from the operation signal output means by the forced return control means on the basis of the success / failure determination result of the success / failure determination means. Thereby, based on execution of a privilege game, the storage medium currently read by the external device can be returned or reading of valuable value information can be cancelled | released. Therefore, the player need not be aware of the storage medium and the valuable value information during the bonus game, and can concentrate on the bonus game. Therefore, by executing the privilege game, it is possible to prevent forgetting that the valuable value information of the storage medium has been read by the external device and forgetting the return process or the release process. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the damage of the player due to theft of the storage medium and misuse of valuable value information.

  In the gaming machine B2, when the success / failure determination condition is satisfied, the satisfied / failure determination condition is stored until the start condition for displaying the identification information of the correctness determination corresponding to the satisfied / failure determination condition is satisfied. A pre-failure determination unit that determines a determination result corresponding to the determination result stored in the determination unit before the start condition is satisfied, and the forced return The control means causes the return signal to be output to the operation signal output means based on the determination that the prior hit determination means is a win. The gaming machine B3,

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or the gaming machine B2, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the determination condition is satisfied, until the start condition for displaying the identification information of the determination result corresponding to the satisfied determination condition is satisfied, the satisfied determination condition is stored by the determination determination storage unit. Is done. The success / failure determination result corresponding to the stored presence / absence determination condition is determined by the prior-correction determination unit before the start condition is satisfied. A return signal is output from the operation signal output means by the forced return control means based on the determination that the pre-winning determination means is a win. Thereby, before the identification information indicating the determination result is displayed on the display unit, the return determination process or the release process is executed in the external device, so that the determination result can be notified to the player in advance. it can. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in the expectation that the return process or the release process will be executed in the external device during the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting that the external device reads the storage medium.

  Valuable display means for controlling display of information based on valuable information of a storage medium read into an external device provided outside the gaming machine by the external device, and a predetermined value corresponding to the valuable information read by the external device In a gaming machine having payout means for paying out a predetermined game medium to a player based on reception of a lending request signal for lending a game medium to a gaming machine, the external display device displays the valuable display means. A signal extracting means for extracting the output display control signal, a valuable determining means for determining valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device based on the signal extracted by the signal extracting means, and the valuable determining means A game machine C1 having a notification means for reporting discrimination information related to valuable value information discriminated by.

  According to the gaming machine C1, information based on the valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device provided outside the gaming machine is displayed on the valuable display means by the external device. Based on the reception of the lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend the predetermined game medium corresponding to the valuable value information read by the external device, the predetermined game medium is paid out to the player by the payout means. A display control signal output from the external device to the valuable display means is extracted by the signal extraction means. Based on the extracted signal, valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device is discriminated by the valuable discriminating means. Discrimination information relating to the discriminated value information is notified by the report notification means. Thereby, the valuable value information of the storage medium can be determined by extracting the signal for displaying the valuable display means. Therefore, the player can be notified of detailed value information by notifying the determination information regarding the determined value information by the notification means. Therefore, the player forgets to execute the storage medium return process or the valuable information release process by recognizing that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. Can be prevented. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from being damaged by the storage medium being stolen or valuable value information being misused.

  In the gaming machine C1, the value display means displays the remaining balance information corresponding to the value information stored in the storage medium as information based on the value information, and pays out the predetermined game medium. Is performed, the remaining balance information corresponding to the updated valuable value information is updated and displayed, and the notification means is displayed on the valuable display means. The game machine C2 is characterized in that the remaining balance information is notified as the discrimination information.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, as information based on the valuable information, the remaining balance information corresponding to the valuable information stored in the storage medium is displayed, and each time a predetermined game medium is paid out, the corresponding valuable value is displayed. The remaining balance information corresponding to the valuable value information that has been consumed and updated is updated and displayed on the valuable value display means. The remaining balance information displayed on the value display means is notified by the notification means as discrimination information. Thus, by notifying the player of the remaining balance of the storage medium, it is possible to recognize that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously determining that there is no remaining balance even though the storage medium has a remaining balance and stopping the game without executing the return process or the release process. is there.

  In the gaming machine C2, the notification means includes a display means capable of displaying a display mode based on the remaining balance information, and the value determining means determines that the remaining balance information is equal to or less than a predetermined set value. If the remaining balance information is determined to be larger than a predetermined set value, the display mode based on the remaining balance information is displayed on the display means in the normal display mode. A gaming machine C3, wherein a display mode based on the remaining balance information is displayed on the display means in a special display mode different from the display mode.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C2, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the notification means, a display mode based on the remaining balance information is displayed by the display means. Further, when it is determined by the value determining means that the remaining balance information is equal to or less than a predetermined set value, a display mode based on the remaining balance information is displayed on the display means in a normal display mode. Further, when it is determined that the remaining balance information is larger than a predetermined set value, a display mode based on the remaining balance information is displayed on the display unit in a special display mode different from the normal display mode. As a result, when the remaining balance is larger than the set value, the display is displayed in a display mode different from the normal time, so that it is possible to make the player strongly recognize that the remaining balance is large. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting the return process and the release process in a state where a lot of remaining balance remains and causing the player to make a great loss.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, on the basis of the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the determination unit for determining whether or not it is correct, and the identification information for notifying the player of the determination result of the success / failure determination unit. Display control means to be displayed on the display means, and when the identification information indicating that the determination result is a win is displayed on the display means by the display control means, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player And when the bonus game executing means determines that the bonus game is to be executed, the informing means stores the storage medium of the external device based on the start of the bonus game. A return notification mode for notifying the player to perform an operation for executing a return process to be returned or a release process for canceling the valuable value information of the read storage medium is notified. Gaming machine C4, characterized in that the at it.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines C1 to 3, the following effects are achieved. Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the determination is performed by the determination unit. Identification information for notifying the player of the determination result is displayed on the display means by the display control means. When the identification information indicating that the determination result is a win is displayed on the display unit by the display control unit, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution unit. When it is determined that the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, a return process for returning the storage medium of the external device based on the start of the privilege game or the read storage medium A notifying means is notified of a return notification mode for notifying the player to perform an operation for executing a release process for canceling the valuable value information. Thereby, since it is possible to notify the player to execute the return process or the release process based on the start of the privilege game, while the player is executing the privilege game, The problem of forgetting that the valuable value information of the storage medium is being read can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the storage medium is stolen or valuable value information is misused.

  Game media according to a lending request signal for reading the valuable information stored in the storage medium by an external device provided outside the gaming machine and requesting the gaming machine to lend gaming media corresponding to the read valuable information Payout means for paying out, and external receiving means for receiving a predetermined external control signal output to the gaming machine when the external device has read the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, In the gaming machine having the above, a state in which the external device reads the valuable value information of the storage medium based on the external signal extraction means for extracting the external control signal and the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extraction means An external determination means for determining whether the external device is an operation means having an operation section operable by the player, and the operation means is operated, An operation signal output means for outputting a return signal to the external device for executing a return process for returning the inserted storage medium to the player or a release process for releasing the reading of the valuable information of the storage medium; A game is provided on the condition that the operation determination means for determining whether or not the operation means has been operated and the external determination means determine that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. A notification means for notifying a user to operate the operation means, and when the operation notification mode is notified by the notification means, the operation determination means is operated by the operation determination means. Based on the determination, the notification means includes notification switching means for switching to a specific notification mode different from the operation notification mode. Game machine D1 which is characterized in.

  According to the gaming machine D1, rental of gaming media that is output to a gaming machine based on the read valuable information by reading the valuable information stored in the storage medium by an external device provided outside the gaming machine The game medium is paid out by the payout means in accordance with a lending request signal for requesting. When the external device is in a state of reading valuable value information stored in the storage medium, a predetermined external control signal output to the gaming machine is received by the external receiving means. The external control signal is extracted by the external signal extraction means. Based on the extracted extracted external signal, the external determining means determines whether the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. Also, a return process for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player based on the operation means having an operation unit that can be operated by the player, or reading of valuable information of the storage medium A return signal for executing a canceling process for canceling is output to the external device by the operation signal output means. Further, it is determined by the operation determination means whether or not the operation means has been operated. An operation notifying mode for notifying the player to operate the operating means is notified by the notifying means on the condition that the external determining means has determined that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. Is done. When the operation notification mode is notified by the notification unit, the notification switching unit switches to a specific notification mode different from the operation notification mode based on the determination that the operation unit is operated by the operation determination unit. It is switched by. Thus, when the player operates the operation means, a specific notification mode is notified, so that the player can easily determine that the operation means has been normally operated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the user from forgetting to confirm whether the external device has normally executed the return process or the release process by the specific notification mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the damage to the player due to theft of the storage medium and the misuse of valuable value information.

  In the gaming machine D1, the game machine D1 has return signal extraction means for extracting a return signal output based on the operation of the operation unit, and the operation determination means is the extracted return signal extracted by the return signal extraction means Based on the above, the game machine D2 is characterized in that it is determined whether or not the operation means has been operated by a player.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a return signal output based on the operation of the operation unit is extracted by the return signal extraction unit. Based on the extracted return signal, the operation determining means determines whether the operating means has been operated by the player. Thereby, it can be recognized correctly whether the player operated the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player in a specific notification mode based on the timing when the operation means is operated. Therefore, it can be confirmed that the player has operated the operation means, and the processing of the external device can be confirmed without forgetting.

  In the gaming machine D1 or the gaming machine D2, the gaming machine D1 or the gaming machine D2 has valuable display means for displaying balance information indicated by valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device based on an external control signal received by the receiving means, The external determining means is configured to be able to determine balance information based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external extracting means, and the operation determining means is configured to allow the balance information to pass through a predetermined minimum balance by the external determining means. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that, when it is determined that the operation means has run out, it is determined that the operation means has been operated.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or the gaming machine D2, the following effects are produced. That is, the balance information indicated by the valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device is displayed on the valuable display means based on the external control signal received by the receiving means. Based on the extracted external signal, the balance information is discriminated by the external discriminating means. When it is determined by the external determination means that the balance information has gone without passing through the predetermined minimum balance, the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated. Accordingly, it is possible to determine that the operation means has been operated by the player without detecting the operation of the operation means. Therefore, the gaming machine can be configured with a simpler configuration.

  In any of the gaming machine D1 to the gaming machine D3, on the basis of the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the determination unit for determining whether or not the game is correct and the identification information that can identify the determination result of the success / failure determination unit. Display control means to be displayed on display means which is one of the means, and dynamic display mode determination for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed by the display control means based on the result of the judgment Means, and when the identification information indicating the winning is displayed on the display means, the bonus game executing means for executing the bonus game advantageous to the player, and the dynamic display mode determining means, And the player determines to operate the operation means based on the fact that the external determination means has determined that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. A return dynamic display mode that is a dynamic display mode including an operation notification mode to be notified is determined, and the notification switching unit is configured to perform the operation by the operation determination unit when the operation notification mode is displayed. Based on the determination that the means has been operated, the gaming machine D4 is switched to a display mode for informing the identification information indicating the winning.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is executed by the success / failure determination means. Identification information that can identify the determination result is displayed by the display control means on the display means that is one of the notification means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed by the display control unit is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the determination result. When the identification information indicating the winning is displayed on the display means, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. An operation for notifying the player to operate the operation means based on the determination result that the determination is successful and the external determination means determining that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. A return dynamic display mode that is a dynamic display mode including a notification mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. When the operation notification mode is displayed, the notification switching unit switches to the display mode for notifying the identification information indicating the win based on the determination that the operation unit is operated by the operation determination unit. Accordingly, since the identification information indicating the winning is displayed when the dynamic display mode of the identification information is operated on the operation means, it is possible to give the player enjoyment of operating the operation means. Accordingly, the player can cause the player to play the game with the expectation that the return dynamic display mode is determined, so that the player can be prevented from forgetting to operate the operation means. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the damage caused by theft of the storage medium and misuse of valuable value information.

  In any of the gaming machine D1 to the gaming machine D3, on the basis of the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the determination unit for determining whether or not the game is correct and the identification information that can identify the determination result of the success / failure determination unit. Display control means to be displayed on display means as one of means, privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when identification information indicating winning is displayed on the display means, and the determination of success / failure When the condition is satisfied, until the start condition for displaying the identification information of the correct / incorrect determination corresponding to the satisfied / inappropriate determination condition is satisfied, the correct / incorrect determination storage means for storing the acquired correct / incorrect determination condition, and the correct / incorrect Pre-failure determination means for determining the success / failure determination result corresponding to the success / failure determination condition stored in the determination storage means before the start condition is satisfied, and the notification means When the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated when it is determined by the part determination means that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium, A gaming machine D5 characterized in that it notifies the player of the result of determination by the means.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is executed by the success / failure determination means. Identification information that can identify the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed on the display unit, which is one of the notification units, by the display control unit. When the identification information indicating the winning is displayed on the display means, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. When the determination condition is satisfied, the determination condition storage means stores the determination condition until the start condition for displaying the identification information of the determination corresponding to the determination condition is satisfied. . The prior determination result corresponding to the stored determination result is determined by the prior determination unit before the start condition is satisfied. When it is determined by the external determination means that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium, the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated, and the advance determination means The determination result is notified to the player by the notification means. Thereby, a privilege can be given to a player by operating an operation means, and the opportunity for a player to operate an operation means can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the situation where the player forgets to operate the operating means and suffers from theft of the storage medium or the abuse of the valuable value information.

  According to a lending request signal for requesting a gaming machine to lend a gaming medium to be output corresponding to the value information read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine and reading the valuable information stored in the storage medium Payout means for paying out game media, and external reception means for receiving a predetermined external control signal output to the gaming machine when the external device is in a state of reading valuable value information stored in the storage medium And external signal reading means for extracting the external control signal, and the external device reads valuable value information of the storage medium based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extraction means. The external determination means for determining whether the player is in the state, an operation means having an operation section operable by the player, and the operation means being operated, An operation signal output means for outputting to the external device a return signal for executing a return process for returning the storage medium read by the apparatus to the player or a release process for releasing the reading of the valuable information of the storage medium; A valid state in which the return signal is output by the operation signal output unit based on an operation of the operation unit, and a prohibited state in which the return signal is prohibited from being output by the operation signal output unit. And a switching control means for switching when a predetermined condition is established as a trigger.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable information stored in the storage medium, and requests the gaming machine to lend gaming media to be output corresponding to the read valuable information. The game medium is paid out by the paying-out means in accordance with the lending request signal. When the external device is in a state of reading valuable value information stored in the storage medium, a predetermined external control signal output to the gaming machine is received by the external receiving means. The external control signal is extracted by the external signal extraction means. Based on the extracted extracted external signal, the external determining means determines whether the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. Based on the operation of the operation unit having an operation unit that can be operated by the player, the return processing for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player or the reading of the valuable information on the storage medium is canceled. A return signal for executing the release processing is output to the external device by the operation signal output means. Based on the operation of the operation means, a predetermined condition is established between a valid state in which a return signal is output by the operation signal output means and a prohibited state in which a return signal is prohibited from being output by the operation signal output means. It is switched by the switching control means when it is established. As a result, even if the player forgets to execute the return process or the release process by switching to a prohibited state where a return signal is not output even if the operation means is operated, the player may suffer from theft. Can be prevented. Therefore, it can concentrate on a game in comfort.

  In the gaming machine E1, based on the operation of the player, the gaming machine E1 includes input means capable of inputting an identification symbol, and identification information storage means for storing identification information input by the input means, and the switching control means Is the state in which the identification information is stored in the identification information storage means in a state where the external determination means satisfying the predetermined condition is determined to be in a state where the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. On the basis of the stored information, the effective state is switched to the prohibited state, while in the prohibited state, the same identification information as the identification information stored in the identification information storage unit is input by the input unit. Based on this, the gaming machine E2 is switched from the prohibited state to the valid state.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are produced. That is, the identification symbol is input by the input means based on the player's operation. The input identification information is stored in the identification information storage means. Based on the fact that the identification information is stored in the identification information storage means in a state in which it is determined that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium by the external determination means that satisfies the predetermined condition. The switching control means switches from the valid state to the prohibited state. On the other hand, when the same identification information as the identification information stored in the identification information storage means is input by the input means in the prohibited state, the switching control means switches from the prohibited state to the valid state. Accordingly, it is possible to easily switch between the valid state and the prohibited state by inputting the identification information. Therefore, damage caused by theft of the storage medium can be prevented by an easy operation. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, when the switching control unit switches from the valid state to the prohibited state, a timing unit that measures the switching execution time, and the timing unit is equal to or greater than a predetermined set value. And a forcible release means for forcibly switching to an effective state when the game machine E3 is reached.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effects are produced. That is, the switching execution time is measured by the time measuring means when the switching control means switches from the valid state to the prohibited state. When the time measuring means becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined set value, the forced release means forcibly switches to the valid state. As a result, the prohibition state can be automatically canceled at a preset time. Therefore, even if illegally set to the prohibited state, it is automatically switched to the valid state, so that the gaming machine can be returned to the normal state.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a prohibition notification mode indicating that the prohibition state is set when the switching control unit is switched from the valid state to the prohibition state based on a predetermined trigger. A gaming machine E4 having a notification means for notification.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the switching control means is switched from the valid state to the prohibited state, the notification means notifies the prohibition notification mode indicating that the prohibition state is set based on a predetermined trigger. Thereby, it can discriminate | determine that it has switched to the prohibition state easily by the prohibition alerting | reporting aspect. Therefore, if the game store is illegally switched to the prohibited state and left unattended, the amusement store side can notice the abnormality at an early stage. Therefore, the gaming machine can always be maintained in a normal state.

  According to a lending request signal for requesting a gaming machine to lend a gaming medium to be output corresponding to the value information read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine and reading the valuable information stored in the storage medium Payout means for paying out game media, and external reception means for receiving a predetermined external control signal output to the gaming machine when the external device is in a state of reading valuable value information stored in the storage medium And external signal reading means for extracting the external control signal, and the external device reads valuable value information of the storage medium based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extraction means. An external discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the player is in a state of being present, a player detecting means for detecting a player, and the external discriminating means for allowing the external device to store the valuable information of the storage medium When the player detection means has not detected a player in a state where it is determined that the player is reading, the player is in a state where the external device is reading valuable information on the storage medium. A gaming machine F1 comprising: a notification unit that notifies a notification mode indicating that there is a game.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable information stored in the storage medium, and requests the gaming machine to rent gaming media to be output in accordance with the read valuable information. The game medium is paid out by the paying-out means in accordance with the lending request signal. When the external device is in a state of reading valuable value information stored in the storage medium, a predetermined external control signal output to the gaming machine is received by the external receiving means. The external control signal is extracted by the external signal extraction means. Based on the extracted extracted external signal, the external determining means determines whether the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. Based on the operation of the operation unit having an operation unit that can be operated by the player, the return processing for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player or the reading of the valuable information on the storage medium is canceled. A return signal for executing the release processing is output to the external device by the operation signal output means. Based on the operation of the operation means, a predetermined condition is established between a valid state in which a return signal is output by the operation signal output means and a prohibited state in which a return signal is prohibited from being output by the operation signal output means. It is switched by the switching control means when it is established. As a result, even if the player forgets to execute the return process or the release process by switching to a prohibited state where a return signal is not output even if the operation means is operated, the player may suffer from theft. Can be prevented. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to concentrate on the game with peace of mind.

  Game media according to a lending request signal for reading the valuable information stored in the storage medium by an external device provided outside the gaming machine and requesting the gaming machine to lend gaming media corresponding to the read valuable information Payout means for paying out, and external receiving means for receiving a predetermined external control signal output to the gaming machine when the external device has read the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, In the gaming machine having the above, a state in which the external device reads the valuable value information of the storage medium based on the external signal extraction means for extracting the external control signal and the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extraction means An external discriminating means for discriminating whether the game is being performed, a game execution discriminating means for discriminating a period during which the player is playing a game, and a predetermined period of time In addition, when it is determined that the game is not being performed, the external determination unit determines that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. A gaming machine F2 comprising: a notification unit that notifies a notification mode indicating that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, the identification symbol is input by the input means based on the operation of the player. The input identification information is stored in the identification information storage means. Based on the fact that the identification information is stored in the identification information storage means in a state in which it is determined that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium by the external determination means that satisfies the predetermined condition. The switching control means switches from the valid state to the prohibited state. On the other hand, when the same identification information as the identification information stored in the identification information storage means is input by the input means in the prohibited state, the switching control means switches from the prohibited state to the valid state. Accordingly, it is possible to easily switch between the valid state and the prohibited state by inputting the identification information. Therefore, damage caused by theft of the storage medium can be prevented by an easy operation. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  Game media according to a lending request signal for reading the valuable information stored in the storage medium by an external device provided outside the gaming machine and requesting the gaming machine to lend gaming media corresponding to the read valuable information Payout means for paying out the game, storage means for storing the game balls paid out to the player by the payout means, and discharge means for discharging the game balls stored in the storage means to the outside of the gaming machine by the player's operation And an external receiving means for receiving a predetermined external control signal to be output to the gaming machine when the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium. A storage determining means for determining whether or not a game ball is stored in the storage means, a discharge operation determining means for determining whether or not the game ball is discharged by the discharge means, and the external control. External signal extraction means for extracting a signal, and external determination means for determining whether the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extraction means And when it is determined that the discharge operation has been executed by the discharge operation determination unit and the storage determination unit determines that the game ball is not stored, the external determination unit determines that the external device has the valuable value of the storage medium. And a notification means for notifying a player of a notification mode indicating that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium when it is determined that the information is being read. A gaming machine F3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine F3, the switching execution time is measured by the timing unit when the switching control unit switches from the valid state to the prohibited state. When the time measuring means becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined set value, the forced release means forcibly switches to the valid state. As a result, the prohibition state can be automatically canceled at a preset time. Therefore, even if the prohibition state is illegally set, it is automatically switched to the valid state, so that the gaming machine can be returned to the normal state.

In the gaming machine F1 to the gaming machine F3, an operating means having an operating unit that can be operated by a player;
A return signal for executing a return process for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player or a release process for canceling the reading of the valuable information of the storage medium based on the operation of the operating means. Operation signal output means for outputting to the external device,
Switching control means for switching between a valid state in which the return signal is output by the operation signal output means and a prohibited state in which the return signal is prohibited from being output by the operation signal output means based on the establishment of a setting condition A gaming machine F4, characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the switching control means is switched from the valid state to the prohibited state, the notification means notifies the prohibition notification mode indicating that the prohibition state is set based on a predetermined trigger. Thereby, it can discriminate | determine that it has switched to the prohibition state easily by the prohibition alerting | reporting aspect. Therefore, if the game store is illegally switched to the prohibited state and left unattended, the amusement store side can notice the abnormality at an early stage. Therefore, the gaming machine can always be maintained in a normal state.

  Game media according to a lending request signal for reading the valuable information stored in the storage medium by an external device provided outside the gaming machine and requesting the gaming machine to lend gaming media corresponding to the read valuable information In a gaming machine having payout means for paying out money, and valuable display means in which information based on the valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device is displayed and controlled by the external device, it is displayed on the valuable display means. Image information detecting means for detecting image information to be detected, information determining means for determining valuable information of the storage medium displayed on the valuable display means from image information detected by the image information detecting means, and information determining means A game machine G1 having a notification means for notifying a player of a notification mode related to valuable value information determined by the player.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable information stored in the storage medium, and requests the gaming machine to lend gaming media in accordance with the read valuable information. In accordance with the lending request signal, the game medium is paid out by the payout means. Information based on the valuable information of the storage medium read into the external device is displayed on the valuable display means that is display-controlled by the external device. Image information displayed on the value display means is detected by the image information detection means. Based on the image information detected by the image information detecting means, the valuable information of the storage medium displayed on the valuable display means is determined by the information determining means. The notifying mode regarding the determined valuable information is notified to the player by the notifying means. Thereby, not only the value display means but also information relating to the value information of the storage medium read by the external device can be confirmed in the notification mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player forgets that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. Therefore, damage to the player due to theft of the storage medium or misuse of valuable value information can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine G1, the image information detecting means detects a light amount of image information displayed on the valuable display means, and the information determining means is based on the light amount detected by the image information detecting means. A gaming machine G2 characterized by discriminating valuable value information corresponding to the light quantity.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are produced. That is, the light quantity of the image information displayed on the valuable display means is detected by the image information detection means. Based on the amount of light detected by the image information detecting means, valuable information corresponding to the amount of light is determined by the information determining means. As a result, it is possible to determine information related to the valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device in synchronization with the information displayed on the valuable display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can accurately identify the information related to the valuable value information.

  In the gaming machine G1, the image information detection means performs an image process of taking an image displayed on the valuable display means, converting it into a numerical value, and converting the information determination means by the image processing. The gaming machine G3 according to claim 1, characterized in that valuable value information corresponding to the set numerical value is discriminated.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the image information detecting means executes image processing for taking an image displayed on the valuable display means and converting it into a numerical value. Valuable value information corresponding to the numerical value converted by the image processing is discriminated by the information discriminating means. As a result, it is possible to determine information related to the valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device in synchronization with the information displayed on the valuable display means. Therefore, the player can accurately identify information related to the valuable value information.

  According to a lending request signal for requesting a gaming machine to lend a gaming medium to be output corresponding to the value information read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine and reading the valuable information stored in the storage medium In a gaming machine having a payout means for paying out game media, an operation means having an operation unit operable by a player, and a storage medium read by the external device based on the operation of the operation means An operation signal output means for outputting a return signal to the external device for executing a return process for returning to the player or a release process for releasing the valuable information of the storage medium, and an operation section of the operation means. To allow a player to operate a permitted state and a prohibition state that is more difficult for the player to operate than the permitted state, and to establish a predetermined change condition Zui, the gaming machine and wherein the switching control means for switching the regulating means to either of said disabled state and the enabled state, and has a H1.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable information stored in the storage medium, and requests the gaming machine to lend gaming media in accordance with the read valuable information. In accordance with the lending request signal, the game medium is paid out by the payout means. Return processing for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player based on the operation means having an operation unit that can be operated by the player, or the valuable value information of the storage medium is released. A return signal for executing the release processing is output from the operation signal output means to the external device. The restricting means is set to a permitted state in which the player can operate the operation portion of the operating means and a prohibited state in which it is more difficult for the player to operate than the permitted state. Based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition, the switching means is switched to either the permitted state or the prohibited state by the switching control means. As a result, it is difficult to operate the operation unit by setting the prohibited state, so that even if the player forgets the return process or the release process, the storage medium is stolen or valuable information The damage of misuse can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine H1, the restriction means moves the restriction member that can be disposed on the front side of the operation unit, and the restriction member to a position on the front side of the operation unit and a position other than the front side of the operation unit. The switching control means switches to the prohibited state by fixing the restricting member at the front side position, and releases the fixed state to the permitted state. A gaming machine H2 that is to be switched.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the restricting member that can be arranged on the front side of the operation unit, and the restricting member are moved by the movable means to a position on the front side of the operation unit and a position other than the front side of the operation unit. By fixing the restricting member at the front surface side position, the switching control means switches to the prohibited state. On the other hand, by releasing the fixation, the switching control means switches to the permitted state. Thereby, in the prohibited state, it becomes difficult to operate the operation unit with the restricting member, and it can be easily determined that the player is set in the prohibited state. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with peace of mind after confirming that it has been switched to the prohibited state.

  In the gaming machine H1 or the gaming machine H2, the switching control includes input means capable of inputting identification information by a player's operation, and identification information storage means capable of storing the identification information input by the input means. In the permitted state, the means switches from the permitted state to the prohibited state based on the establishment of a change condition that the identification information input by the input means is newly stored in the identification information storage means. On the other hand, if it is in the prohibited state, it is assumed that the same identification information as the identification information stored in the identification information storage means is input by the input means, and that the change condition is satisfied and the permission is changed from the prohibited state to the permission state. A gaming machine H3 that is switched to a state.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or the gaming machine H2, the following effects are produced. That is, the identification information is input by the input means by the player's operation. The input identification information is stored in the identification information storage means. If it is in the permitted state, the switching control means switches from the permitted state to the prohibited state, assuming that the identification information input by the input means is newly stored in the identification information storage means, and that the change condition is satisfied. On the other hand, when it is in the prohibited state, the switching control means from the prohibited state to the permitted state is established as the change condition is satisfied that the same identification information as the identification information stored in the identification information storage means is input by the input means. It is switched by. Accordingly, it is possible to switch between the prohibited state and the permitted state by inputting the identification information, and it is possible to switch between the prohibited state and the permitted state according to the convenience of the player. Therefore, it is possible to play a game efficiently and safely.

  An external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable information stored in the storage medium, and requests the gaming machine to lend gaming media output to the gaming machine in accordance with the read valuable information. In a gaming machine having a payout means for paying out game media in accordance with a lending request signal, external signal receiving means for receiving an external signal output to the gaming machine based on valuable value information of a storage medium read by the external device; Whether the game is being executed using the valuable information determining means for determining the valuable information based on the information extracted from the external signal output to the external signal receiving means and the game medium. A game execution determining means for determining a game period, and a period during which the game execution determining means determines that a game is being executed using the game medium for a predetermined period of time. By determining whether the valuable value information determined by the valuable value information determining means has changed by a predetermined value or more, a rented game that is a game using the game medium paid out by the paying means according to the lending request signal is obtained. Lending game determining means for determining whether or not the game machine is being executed.

  According to the gaming machine I1, an external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable information stored in the storage medium, and outputs the gaming medium output to the gaming machine in accordance with the read valuable information. The game medium is paid out by the payout means in accordance with a lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend. An external signal output to the gaming machine based on the valuable value information of the storage medium read by the external device is received by the external signal receiving means. Based on the information extracted from the external signal output to the external signal receiving means, the valuable information is determined by the valuable information determining means. Whether or not a game is being executed using the game medium is determined by the game execution determining means. The valuable value information determined by the valuable value information determining means changes by a predetermined value or more during a period when it is determined that the game is being executed using the game medium for a predetermined period by the game execution determining means. The lending game determining means determines whether or not a lending game, which is a game using the game medium paid out by the paying means according to the lending request signal, is being executed. Thereby, it is possible to determine with the gaming machine whether the rented game is being played or whether a game different from the rented game is being played.

  Based on the external signal, the valuable value display means for displaying the valuable value information indicated by the external signal, and the external signal extraction means for extracting the external signal for displaying the valuable value display means, the valuable value information The discriminating means discriminates the valuable information displayed on the valuable display means based on the external extraction signal extracted by the external signal extracting means, and when predetermined valuable information is displayed, In the case where it is determined by the valuable value information determining means, the lending game determining means has notifying means for executing a predetermined notification based on the determination that a game different from the rented game is being executed. The gaming machine I2 according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is I2.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the external signal, the valuable value information indicated by the external signal is displayed by the valuable display means. An external signal for displaying the valuable display means is extracted by the external signal extraction means. Based on the external extraction signal extracted by the external signal extraction means, the valuable information displayed on the valuable display means is determined by the valuable information determination means. When the valuable value information determining means determines that the predetermined valuable value information is displayed, a predetermined notification is made based on the fact that the rental game determining means determines that a game different from the rented game is being executed. Is executed by the notification means. As a result, when a rented game is not being performed, a predetermined notification is executed if the storage medium is being read into the external device, so that the player can store the valuable information on the storage medium in the external device. You can notice that it is being read. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the situation where the player leaves the seat while the storage medium is being read in the external device, and the storage medium is stolen or the valuable value information is misused.

  On the basis of the establishment of the gaming machine I1 or I2 success / failure determination condition, a validity determination execution unit that executes a determination of success / failure, a display unit that displays identification information indicating a result of the determination of validity / invalidity of the failure determination execution unit, and a display on the display unit A dynamic display mode determination unit that determines a dynamic display mode of the identification information, and a reduction in the balance indicated by the valuable value information determined by the valuable information determination unit. Investment amount storage means for storing, wherein the dynamic display mode determination means determines one dynamic display mode from among the plurality of dynamic display modes based on the value of the investment amount storage means The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine I1 or I2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. That is, based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the determination of success / failure is executed by the success / failure determination execution means. The display unit displays identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. The dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed on the display unit is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit. Based on the decrease in the balance indicated by the valuable value information determined by the valuable information determining means, the total amount of the decrease is stored in the investment amount storage means. Based on the value of the investment amount storage means, one dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit from among the plurality of dynamic display modes. Thereby, the type of the dynamic display mode determined based on the investment amount of the player can be changed, and a different dynamic display mode can be displayed to the player who has played the game for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D5, E1 to E4, F1 to F4, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine Z1 characterized by being. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D5, E1 to E4, F1 to F4, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I3, the gaming machine is a slot machine A gaming machine Z2 characterized by that. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D5, E1 to E4, F1 to F4, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine Z3, which is a fusion of a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
41 Balance indicator (external receiving means, valuable display means)
42 Return button (operation means, operation signal output means)
42a Return extraction means (return signal extraction means)
81 3rd symbol display device (notification means)
111 Dispensing control device (dispensing means)
114 Display control device (display control means)
LDa, LDb, LDc Phototransistor (external signal extraction means)
S108 External discrimination means S306 NG determination means S308, S310 Dynamic display mode determination means S1004 Bonus game execution means S1708 Operation determination means S1905 Notification switching means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  A conventional gaming machine has a lending unit (card reading unit) for lending a gaming medium to a gaming machine using a medium such as a card or a coin in order to lend gaming media such as a gaming ball. The one to be attached to was proposed.

JP-A-11-221336

However, in such a gaming machine, the gaming machine in response to a command from the rent for the unit (card reading unit) side is only perform control to leave pay game medium, the game machine side, not controlled for rent unit. Therefore, as a gaming machine, it was not possible to determine whether a card, a coin, or the like was inserted in the lending unit. For this reason, in such a gaming machine, it is impossible to control the player to forget to remove a card or coin, and the player forgets to remove the card or coin, resulting in theft or loss. there were.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem like, and its object is to provide a gaming machine that reduces the disadvantages of Yu technique's.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a game ball in which valuable information stored in a storage medium is read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine and corresponding to the read valuable information. A payout means for paying out game balls in accordance with a loan request signal for requesting a gaming machine to rent, a first storage means capable of storing game balls paid out to a player by the payout means, and a first storage thereof When a game ball is paid out in a state where a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the device, the discharged game ball is guided and stored, and stored in the first storage device. The first discharge means for discharging the game ball to the second storage means by the player's operation, and the second discharge for discharging the game ball stored in the second storage means to the outside of the game machine by the player's operation Means and the external device includes the storage medium. An external receiving means for receiving a predetermined external control signal to be output to the gaming machine when the valuable value information stored in is read, and for extracting the external control signal And an external discrimination means for discriminating whether or not the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extraction means, and the player can operate A return process for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player or reading the valuable information of the storage medium based on the operation means having an operation unit and the operation means being operated An operation signal output means for outputting a return signal for executing a release process for releasing the operation to the external device, an operation determination means for determining whether or not the operation means has been operated, An operation notification mode for notifying the player to operate the operation means is notified on the condition that the external determination means determines that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. When the operation notification mode is notified by the notification unit and the notification unit, the operation determination unit determines that the operation unit is operated by the operation determination unit. Notification switching means for switching to a different specific notification mode, storage determination means for determining whether or not a game ball is stored in the first storage means, and discharge for determining whether or not the game ball is discharged by the second discharge means An operation determining means, an external determining means for determining whether the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium based on the extracted external signal; When it is determined that the discharging operation has been executed by the discharging operation determining means, and it is determined that the game ball is not stored by the storage determining means, the external device has stored the valuable information of the storage medium by the external determining means. And a notification means for notifying the player of a notification mode indicating that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium when it is determined that the information is being read. .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable information stored in the storage medium, and the gaming machine is lent out in accordance with the read valuable information. A payout means for paying out a game ball in accordance with a lending request signal for requesting the player, a first storage means capable of storing the game ball paid out to the player by the payout means, and a predetermined amount or more in the first storage means When the game ball is paid out in a state where the game balls are stored, the second storage means for guiding and storing the paid-out game balls and the game balls stored in the first storage means are played. A first discharge means for discharging to the second storage means by a player's operation, a second discharge means for discharging the game ball stored in the second storage means to the outside of the gaming machine by a player's operation, and the external Valuable device stored in the storage medium An external receiving means for receiving a predetermined external control signal output to the gaming machine when the value information is read, and an external signal extracting means for extracting the external control signal; Based on the extracted external signal extracted by the signal extracting means, there is an external discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium, and an operation unit operable by the player. And a return process for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player based on the operation means being operated, or a release process for releasing the reading of the valuable information of the storage medium. Operation signal output means for outputting a return signal to the external device, operation determination means for determining whether the operation means has been operated, and the external determination means Informing means for informing an operation notifying mode for informing a player to operate the operating means on the condition that the external device is determined to be in a state of reading valuable value information of a storage medium; When the operation notification mode is notified by the notification unit, a specific notification different from the operation notification mode is provided to the notification unit based on the determination that the operation unit is operated by the operation determination unit. Notification switching means for switching to a mode, storage determination means for determining whether or not a game ball is stored in the first storage means, and discharge operation determination means for determining whether or not the game balls are discharged by the second discharge means , An external discriminating unit for discriminating whether or not the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium based on the extracted external signal; and the discharging operation discriminating unit In the state where it is determined that the discharge operation has been executed by the storage determination unit and the storage determination unit determines that the game ball is not stored, the external determination unit reads the valuable information of the storage medium. If it is determined that there is, it has a notifying means for notifying the player of a notification mode indicating that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium.

Therefore, there is an effect that the disadvantage of the player can be reduced.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the opening image at the time of the jackpot start of a display screen, (b) is the figure which showed the card return fluctuation | variation aspect displayed on a display screen. (A) is the figure which showed the display aspect of the password setting screen displayed on a display screen, (b) is the figure which showed the display aspect of the password input screen displayed on a display screen. (A) is the figure which showed the notification aspect of the card insertion displayed on a display screen, (b) is the figure which showed the notification aspect of the card balance displayed on a display screen. (A) is the figure which showed the balance display, (b) is the figure which showed the frame button of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the connection of the card | curd reading unit and pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the connection of the balance display and card reading unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the connection of the return button of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment, and a card reading unit. (A)-(d) is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the various counter values used with a pachinko machine. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of ROM of the main controller, (b) was the figure which showed the jackpot random number table, (c) showed the jackpot type table. It is a figure and (d) is the figure which showed the random number table per common symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the card | curd process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the customer waiting production process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding change process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the card effect control process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the card | curd alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the card | curd return effect process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the password input process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the password process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the break process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the structure at the time of locking the shutter member in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is typical about the structure at the time of releasing the shutter member in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure shown in. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the shutter input process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the shutter setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the shutter process which is one process of the shutter setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment.

  DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 (see FIG. 7B) is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. As shown in FIG. 7B, the frame button 22 is an enter button 22a, an upward button 22b that mainly designates an upward direction, a left button 22c that mainly designates a left direction, and mainly designates a downward direction. The down button 22d is mainly composed of a right button for designating the right direction.

  The determination button 22a is, for example, when performing an operation of selecting a setting button displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (determining with the input password) on a password setting screen (see FIG. 5A) described later. In addition, it is operated by the player. The up button 22b, for example, in the password setting screen, displays a selection image (the background color of the displayed number changes) indicating the selected number for one digit of the password selected by the cursor. Move to. On the other hand, the downward button 22d moves the selected image indicating the selected number downward. As will be described later, the password is composed of a 4-digit number, and the digit for selecting the number is determined by moving the cursor left and right by the right direction button 22c or the left direction button 22e. When the player operates the left direction button 22c, the cursor moves to the left digit. When the player operates the right button 22e, the cursor moves to the right digit. The up button 22b, the left button 22c, the down button 22d, and the right button 22e specify the direction to the player when, for example, the character displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is moved up, down, left, or right. It may be configured to be used as appropriate.

  In addition, a break button 500 is provided on the front side of the upper plate 17 so that the card inserted into the card return unit 300 cannot be returned when the player takes a break. The break button 500 will be described later, but if a password is not set by the player operating (pressing) the break button 500, a password setting screen for setting a password (FIG. 5A). Is displayed to inform the player to set a password. When the password is set, even if the return button 42 is pressed, the operation is set to an invalid state (invalidated). If a password has already been set (for example, when the break button 500 is pressed and a password is set), a password input screen (see FIG. 5B) is displayed and set. By inputting the password, the return button 42 can be set valid (validated).

  In the present embodiment, when the break button 500 is operated, the password is set to invalidate the return button 42. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the break button 500 is pressed, , Forcibly disable the return button 42, provide a break flag indicating that a break is in progress, set the break flag to on, and return to the pachinko machine 10 only when the break flag is on You may comprise so that the return switch which can validate the button 42 is provided in the position which a game store side can operate. With this configuration, if the player operates the break button 500, the player can immediately go to a break and the operation becomes easy.

  Further, when the break button 500 is operated, the ball lending button 43 may be invalidated, or the game ball may be prohibited from being fired. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent problems such as illegally lending a ball during a break or playing without permission by another person.

  In addition, the password is set by operating the break button 500, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the return button 42 may be immediately invalidated by operating the break button 500. In such a configuration, a break release button that can be operated by a store clerk of the game store is provided on the back side of the gaming machine, the inside of the front frame 14 or the like, and the store clerk is called to release it.

  When the break button 500 is operated to invalidate the return button 42, the return button 42 is invalidated until the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is initialized or a set password is input. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an upper limit time may be provided for the time when the return button 42 is invalidated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a problem that the password is accidentally set and the return button 42 remains invalid for a long time.

  Further, when the break button 500 is operated and the return button 42 is invalidated, a notification mode indicating that the return button 42 is invalidated (for example, the third symbol display device 81 indicates “Now resting! "!" May be displayed. Furthermore, you may comprise so that the time when the return button 42 is invalidated may be displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. By configuring in this way, the pachinko machine 10 can be easily informed to a store clerk or the like that the break button 500 is operated and the return button 42 is invalidated. Therefore, even if there is a pachinko machine 10 that has been left with the return button 42 disabled for a long time, the store clerk of the amusement shop can find it early and cancel the invalidation of the return button 42 Thus, the card inserted in the card reading unit 300 can be collected and managed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being played for a long time from being continuously played and causing damage to the game store. Also, a preset time is set in advance, and when the return button 42 is invalidated for the set time or longer, a notification is made that the return button 42 has been invalidated for the preset time or longer. It may be configured. By comprising in this way, the game store side can identify the pachinko machine 10 invalidated for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the return button 42 from being left invalidated.

  A human sensor 400 is provided on the front side of the upper plate 17. The human sensor 400 is a sensor for detecting a player who plays the pachinko machine 10 using infrared rays. The human sensor 400 is turned on when a player is detected, and is configured to output a signal to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. When the human sensor 400 is turned off and a card is inserted in the card reading unit 300, the characters “Card is in!” Are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and voice output is performed. A voice “card is inserted” is output from the device 226 (S1814 in FIG. 32).

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to return the card in a state where the card is inserted into the card reading unit 300. Although not shown, this notification mode is configured to be stopped (erased) when the break button 500 is operated.

  In the present embodiment, the card notification process is performed as soon as the human sensor 400 is turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the human sensor is turned off for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Then, it may be configured to notify after the elapse of time. With this configuration, even when the human sensor 400 is temporarily turned off by the player moving his / her body in front of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, swinging his / her body side to side), It is possible to prevent the notification from being executed, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, an insertion notification lamp 310 for notifying that a card has been inserted into a card reading unit 300 described later is provided on the left side of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front. The insertion notification lamp 310 is formed in a triangular shape, and is arranged with the apex of the triangle facing the direction of the card reading unit 300 so as to point to the card reading unit 300. The insertion notification lamp 300 is controlled to be lit when a prepaid dedicated card is inserted into the card reading unit 300. The insertion notification lamp 310 is composed of a red LED, and has a higher luminance than other light emitting means (LED).

  As described above, when the card is inserted into the card reading unit 300, the insertion notification lamp 310 is lit, so that the player can be prevented from forgetting that the card is being inserted into the card reading unit 300. . In addition, since the light is lit with higher brightness than other light emitting means, even when playing a game, the other light emitting means is lit, so that the insertion notification lamp 310 is not lit. You can prevent problems.

  In the present embodiment, the card reading unit 300 has been described as being limited to the left side of the pachinko machine 10. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the card reading unit 300 may be positioned on the left or right side. 310 is also provided on the right side of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front, and a changeover switch or the like is provided in the pachinko machine 10, so that the direction in which the card reading unit 300 is arranged is set in the pachinko machine 10 by the changeover switch and is turned on The lamp 310 may be set. Further, by providing a sensor or the like for detecting the card reading unit 300 on the side surface of the gaming machine, the direction of the card reading unit 300 on which the pachinko machine 10 is arranged can be automatically detected and set. Good. With this configuration, even if the card reading unit 300 is variously arranged, it is possible to accurately notify the player that the card has been inserted, and forget that the player has inserted the card. Can be prevented.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a balance display 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into the card reading unit 300 (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent according to the operation. Is called. Specifically, the balance display 41 is an area where the remaining amount information of the card is displayed, and a built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as a remaining amount information. The ball lending button 43 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card. . The return button 42 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card reading unit 300.

  The card reading unit 300 is for reading the balance amount data stored in the card, and a card insertion slot 306 for inserting a card having a valuable value similar to money at a substantially central portion in the vertical direction. Is arranged. A card usable lamp 301 is disposed above the card insertion slot 306 and above the card reading unit 300. The card usable lamp 301 can insert a card into the card insertion slot 306, for example. On the other hand, it is turned on when the card cannot be inserted into the card insertion slot 306. Therefore, the player can determine whether or not the card reading unit 300 is usable by visually recognizing the card available lamp 301.

  An amount setting button for setting a loan amount based on the balance amount data recorded on the card at a position between the card insertion slot 306 and the card usable lamp 301 and above the card reading unit 300 302 is arranged, and by pressing this amount setting button 302, the lending amount can be set to 100 yen, 200 yen, 300 yen or 500 yen. Normally, the loan amount is set to 500 yen, and the payout of the ball P corresponding to 100 yen (for example, 25 balls) is made five times (for example, 125 balls).

  A fraction display button 303 is arranged below the amount setting button 302. The fraction display button 303 is pressed when displaying the fraction on the balance display 41 when the balance amount stored in the card is less than the minimum loan amount (for example, 100 yen). .

  Below the fraction display button 303, a pair of upper and lower connection table direction display lamps 304 formed in a substantially triangular shape is disposed. The pair of connecting table direction indicator lamps 304 are for indicating the direction of arrangement (parallel arrangement) of the pachinko machine 10 to which the card reading unit 300 is connected, and one LED is built in each of them. ing. Therefore, for example, when the card reading unit 300 is connected to a pachinko machine (not shown) arranged on the left side, the upper LED is turned on. A card insertion-in-progress lamp 305 composed of one LED is disposed below the connection table direction indicator lamp 304. The card insertion-in-progress lamp 305 is provided when a card is inserted into the card insertion slot 306. On when the card is present, the light is turned off when the card is not inserted into the card insertion slot 306. The card usable lamp 301 and the connecting table direction indicator lamp 304 are turned on when the card reading unit 300 is turned on.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Handle sensor (touch sensor) 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of a sphere during a pressing operation, and a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 are detected by a change in electric resistance. And a variable resistor (not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the handle sensor (touch sensor) 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount. A ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes according to the operation amount, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. In a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the handle sensor (touch sensor) 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

  A lower part of the front surface of the lower dish 50 is provided with a ball removal button (ball removal lever) 52 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower dish 50 downward. The ball removal button (ball removal lever) 52 is always urged to the right, and the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is slid to the left against the urge. It opens and the sphere spontaneously drops and is discharged from its bottom opening. The operation of the ball removal button (ball removal lever) 52 is normally performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “a thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. .

  The ball removal button 52 is provided with a ball removal button sensor 52a (see FIG. 8) that detects whether a slide operation has been performed. The ball removal button sensor 52a is composed of a limit sensor. When the ball removal button 52 is operated and the bottom opening of the lower plate 50 is opened, the ball removal button 52 is turned on. It is configured. With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 can determine whether or not the ball removal button 52 has been operated by the player. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64, a special symbol (first design) is drawn, and when the ball passes the second entrance 67, a normal symbol (first 2 designs) will be drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, Is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). ) Is released, and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbol jackpot types: “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”. After the special gaming state is over, the added value after the jackpot is over, according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when the special symbol (the first symbol) is drawn, after the special symbol variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37 and a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is held is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display. It is shown by the device 37 and also in the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started. Note that a special winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special gaming state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special gaming state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls enter the first winning opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It becomes a state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for a ball to enter the first entrance 64, and as a result, a special symbol is easily drawn.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the fluctuation display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is the first symbol display device 37. And is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, there are two types of special jackpot types, “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”. In both cases of “big hit A” and “big hit B”, a special gaming state (15R big hit) with 15 rounds is set. After that, when the jackpot is A, the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases after the jackpot ends until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. Further, in the case of “big hit B”, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during special symbol change) from the end of the big hit until the next big hit.

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol high probability state (during special symbol change), in other words, a special gaming state (15R). It is the state of the game that is easy to shift to big hit. On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol”, which has a lower probability of jackpot than the probability variation state of a special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbol). The “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time-short state) means a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol short-time state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state”, which means that the normal symbol hit probability is a normal state, that is, a state where the hit probability is lower than that in the short-time period. Show.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power supply or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “special symbol low probability state”. Thereafter, when the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, if the jackpot type is “big jackpot B”, the process shifts to “a high probability state of the special symbol” and also shifts to the “short time state of the normal symbol”. After that, when the special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot type is “Big Jack A”, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the low probability state of the special symbol, and the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. Until it is done, it becomes a high probability state of a normal symbol.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is being executed or not. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or variation is not executed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (the first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is configured to be suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of suspensions is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, it corresponds to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an opening display mode for notifying the player of the start of the jackpot game when the jackpot game is started. Although details will be described later, when a jackpot game is started when a card is inserted in the card reading unit 300, it is inserted into the card reading unit 300 as shown in FIG. The characters “Please press the card return button!”, Which is a display mode that prompts the player to operate the return button 42, are displayed so that the player can eject the card and return it to the player.

  With this configuration, when a jackpot game is started, a large amount of game balls are paid out to the player, and therefore, there is no need for a lending ball for a while. It is possible to prevent the user from forgetting that the card is inserted and forgetting to return the card after the game is over. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the card has been forgotten to be returned or the card is stolen or lost. Further, when a lending ball is not required, it is possible to prevent the ball lending button 43 from being erroneously operated and unnecessarily reducing the card balance.

  The 3rd symbol (special symbol) displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is composed of 10 kinds of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”. The main symbol is composed of three columns of left, middle, and right. When the three symbols are stopped and displayed with the same number in the center, it indicates that the lottery result was a big hit. In the present embodiment, when the stop display is performed with even numbers of “0, 2, 4, 6, 8”, it is notified that the jackpot A has been won, and “1, 3, 5, 7 , 9 ”are arranged in odd numbers, the player is notified that the jackpot B has been won.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 37), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the second symbol hold lamp 84. The second symbol holding lamp 84 is composed of four LEDs. On the second symbol holding lamp 84, one LED is turned on for each holding ball, and the number of holding balls is notified in accordance with the number of lighting of the LED. That is, when one LED is lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84, it indicates that the number of held balls is one, and when four LEDs are lit, the number of held balls is four. Indicates that there is. Further, when the LED is not lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84, it indicates that the number of holding balls is 0, that is, there is no holding ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to four times, but three times. You may set below or 5 times (for example, 8 times). Further, not only the second symbol hold lamp 84 but also a hold display symbol (for example, “●”) may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to display the number of holds.

  Further, the LED of the second symbol holding lamp 84 is configured to be able to switch and display both blue and red. As will be described in detail later, it is normally lit in blue to inform the player of the number of holds, but is held by operating the return button 42 while the card is inserted in the card reading unit 300. If there is a lottery game that is a big win among the lottery games that are being held (the result of prefetching is that a big win is held), the LED corresponding to the hold changes from blue to red and is lit and displayed.

  By configuring in this way, by operating the return button 43, it is possible to obtain a gaming privilege (you can know the lottery result before the start of the variation of the third symbol), and always return the player to the return button 43 Can be conscious of operating (pressing). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the state in which the card remains in the card reading unit 300, and it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to return the card.

  In addition, the second symbol holding lamp 84 is changed from blue to red to notify the result of prefetching. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured to notify the user to insert the returned card once again. With this configuration, for example, when a special symbol is hit, a player with a feather opens and a player wins a special prize opening (V prize opening) provided in the prize opening. In the case of a pachinko machine 10 configured to receive a bonus game, a game ball is required when a special symbol is hit, so a game ball is prepared in preparation for the special symbol (rental of a ball) Can be operated). Therefore, a state advantageous to the player can be given by operating the return button 42.

  In the present embodiment, the game benefits obtained by operating the return button 43 are notified of the lottery result of the game being held before the start of the variable display of the third symbol. For example, a two-dimensional image of a two-dimensional code or the like (for example, a QR code (registered trademark)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the two-dimensional code is read by a mobile phone or the like. It may be a privilege that allows the character used in the above, the voice of the character, and the like to be obtained. Moreover, it is good also as a privilege which can obtain the information (for example, the number of jackpots and the balance of the day (difference ball)) of the pachinko machine 10 by operating the return button 43. By comprising in this way, the player can increase the opportunity which operates the return button 43, and can prevent the malfunction which forgets to return a card and returns home.

  FIG. 4B is a diagram showing a card return variation mode that is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the 3rd symbol starts to change and reach a reach state where the left and right main symbols stop at the same symbol, “Press the card return button!” Is a notification mode that prompts the player to operate the return button 42! "Is displayed. Thereafter, when the player operates the return button 42 within a predetermined period of time, the letters “big hit” are displayed in accordance with the timing, and “777”, which is the display mode of the third symbol indicating the big hit, is stopped and displayed. The

  With this configuration, if the player is in a state where a card is inserted into the card reading unit 300, the determination result of the lottery game is displayed at the timing when the return button 42 is operated. Thus, the player himself can have a feeling that the symbol that is a big hit has been stopped. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to return the card by operating the return button 42 with special expectations. Also, in the case of a variation mode that is a big hit, by determining and executing the card return variation mode, after that, there is no need to lend a ball for the time being, so that the player should withdraw the card Can be made.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, a password setting screen and an input screen for setting the invalidation / validation of the return button 42 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the details will be described later, but the special symbol (the third symbol) fluctuates for a predetermined time or more when the card is inserted in the card reading unit 300 and the password is not yet set. If the stopped state (a state where no game ball enters the first entrance 64) continues for 30 seconds or longer in this embodiment, the password setting screen shown in FIG. It is displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the password setting screen displays characters “Please set password” to inform the player that the password setting screen is displayed. Then, characters “1 to 5” for setting a 4-digit password are displayed for each digit below the character. A cursor indicating the selected digit is displayed in a triangular display form, and the digit on which the cursor is displayed on the left side indicates a digit from which a number can currently be selected. Then, the background color of the number indicated by the cursor is displayed in a color different from the other background colors (for example, the normal background color is blue, and when selected, a white background is displayed). By operating the frame button 22, the cursor moves up, down, left and right, and when the player specifies an arbitrary 4-digit password and operates the enter button 22a, the specified password is stored in the pachinko machine 10 ( Set).

  In FIG. 5B, when a password for invalidating the return button 42 has already been set, the special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time or more (in this embodiment, 5 seconds or more). Otherwise, it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The text “Please enter your password” is displayed to inform you that it is a password input screen, and the password input screen is displayed in the same way as the password setting screen.

  FIG. 6A is a diagram showing a card insertion notification display mode for notifying that a card is inserted in the card reading unit 300 displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This card insertion notification display mode is related to the state of the gaming machine (the state of whether or not a game is being performed) on the third symbol display device 81 at regular intervals when a card is inserted into the card reading unit 300. Displayed. In the present embodiment, the display is performed for 5 seconds every 30 seconds.

  FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a card balance display mode for notifying the player of the card balance displayed after the card insertion notification display mode is displayed. The amount information is displayed based on the card balance. This card balance display mode is displayed for 5 seconds after the card insertion notification display mode shown in FIG. Then, after 30 seconds, the card insertion notification display mode is displayed and then displayed again. That is, the card balance display mode is also displayed with a 30-second cycle. Further, when the balance display mode is a predetermined amount or more (in this embodiment, 3000 yen or more), the display mode normally displayed in blue characters is displayed in red characters.

  By configuring in this way, only when the amount is more than a certain amount, it is displayed in a conspicuous character color, so that the player can be made aware that a card with a high balance remaining is inserted. Therefore, the remaining balance can be easily known. Further, since the balance display is not always performed in a conspicuous color, it is possible to prevent the balance display from interfering with the game.

  In this embodiment, the card insertion notification display mode and the card balance display mode are displayed with a 30-second cycle. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a 60-second cycle may be used. Any period may be used. In addition, by setting the card insertion notification display mode and the card balance display mode to a prohibited period that is not displayed in a gaming state (for example, a state in which a variable display mode of a specific special symbol is being variably displayed), The trouble that cannot concentrate on the game can be prevented by the insertion notification display mode and the card balance display mode.

  In the present embodiment, the balance display mode is such that the character color is changed when the card balance is greater than or equal to a predetermined amount. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the character size (font) is changed or the character is changed. You may comprise so that it may blink.

  In the main controller 110, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a special symbol lottery is performed using the ball as a trigger, and then a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. Variation display of symbols is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5 (a), the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and as a result, the third symbol display device 81 has the first symbol display device. In response to the 37 variation display, the 3rd symbol variation display is performed.

  When the 3rd symbol variation display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, first, the 3rd symbol's high-speed variation display is started, and then a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds to 60 seconds). When elapses, the display switches to the medium symbol variation display of the third symbol, and further switches to the low symbol variation display of the third symbol. Here, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the stop display in which the main symbols of the same number (the third symbol) are aligned is performed, the variation effect is ended, and then the jackpot effect is started. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, a stop display in which the main symbols of the same number (the third symbol) are not aligned is performed, the variation effect ends, and if there is a pending start prize, The next special symbol will be drawn and the next variation effect will be started.

  The jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which the opening effect is performed, a period in which the round effect is performed, and a period in which the ending effect is performed. The opening effect is to notify the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on, and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed will be opened repeatedly, thereby increasing the player's expectation. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. In addition, the ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special gaming state and the game value given to the player after the jackpot ends (whether the special symbol is a high probability state or a normal symbol high probability state) ) To the player, or to notify the player that the lottery result will be a big win in the lottery of the special symbol that is put on hold (to perform a definite effect display).

  Further, since the first entrance 64 is a winning entrance from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric symbol is released as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball enters the first entrance. As it easily enters the ball opening 64, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of possessions or a state in which the possession is not decreased even if a game is performed. You can get a feeling of a period that you can get a big jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game continuously.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating, by a lighting state, whether or not a normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the second entrance 67, As a stop symbol after the end of the change, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Fluctuation display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is activated for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured such that a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is reserved up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of balls held is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed in the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed so as to become a big hit stop symbol. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the game state transitions to a special game state (a big hit of 5 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated five times (five rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 only in one direction. The main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 are configured to transmit commands in both directions.

  In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select the special symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type in the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 A special hit type counter C2 to be used, a stop type selection counter C3 used to select an outage stop type in the special symbol, a special initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the special hit random number counter C1, A variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection is used. Further, the normal winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 24). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance slot. Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). The configuration is back. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the special initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

  The special initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the special hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the special initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The special initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first ball slot 64. It is stored in the area 203a. And the value of the random number which becomes the special symbol jackpot is set by a special symbol jackpot random number table (FIG. 10A), which will be described later, stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and is incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), the value returns to 0. The value of the special hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first symbol The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the display corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The aspect is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  With reference to FIG. 10, each data stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 10A is a diagram schematically showing a part of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the ROM 202, a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a regular symbol random number table 202c, a jackpot variation pattern table 202d, a variation pattern table 202e for release, a variation pattern table 202f for ordinary symbols, and a stop type command for ordinary symbols 202g is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (b), the jackpot random number table 202a has a hit counter value for determining whether or not the special hit random number counter C1 acquired when a game ball enters the first entrance 64 is determined. It is a set data table. When the special symbol has a low probability (normal game state), the value of the special hit random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit is set to one, specifically, "7" is a hit counter that is determined to be a big hit. Is set to a value. In addition, when the special symbol has a high probability (probability game state), the value of the special winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a big hit is set to 10, and specifically, “0 to 9” is determined to be a big hit. Is set to the hit counter value.

  As shown in FIG. 10C, the jackpot type table 202b is a hit counter that is determined to be hit by a special hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the game ball entering the first entrance 64. If it is a value, it is a data table for determining whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B. When the value of the special hit type counter CS2 obtained is one of “0 to 49” based on the game ball entering the first entrance 64, the big hit A (15R normal big hit) is It is determined. On the other hand, when the value of the acquired special hit type counter CS2 is any of “50 to 99”, the big hit B (15R probability variable big hit) is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 10D, the normal symbol random number table 202c is a hit counter value for determining whether or not the normal hit random number counter C4 acquired when the game ball passes through the second entrance 67. Is a data table in which is set. When the normal symbol has a low probability (normal game state), the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 determined to be win is set to “5 to 28”. Further, when the normal symbol has a high probability (short-time gaming state), the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 determined to be a win is set to “5 to 204”.

  The jackpot variation pattern table 202d is a variation pattern that is selected as a variation display mode of the third symbol when the determination result of the special symbol is a jackpot, and a plurality of jackpots based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 One jackpot variable display mode is determined from among the variable display modes for use (dynamic display mode for jackpots).

  The deviation variation pattern table 202e is data in which a plurality of deviation variation patterns (dynamic deviation display manners) selected as the variation display manner of the third symbol are stored when the determination result of the special symbol is wrong. It is a table. The variation pattern for deviation is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  The stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stops. “Reach out” (for example, 98, 99), “Leach other than out of front / rear out” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before or after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach, and “Complete” without reach Three stop (rendering) patterns, such as “off” (for example, a range of 0 to 89), are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

In the variation pattern table 202e for detachment, a plurality of variation patterns are set with respect to the variation mode determined by the stop type selection counter C3, and the values of the variation type selection counter CS1 are assigned and acquired. One deviation variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  The normal symbol variation pattern table 202f is a data table in which a variation variation pattern and a variation variation pattern of a variation variation pattern for a normal symbol with a low probability and a variation pattern for a normal symbol with a high probability are stored. As for the variation pattern for the low probability of the normal symbol, the normal symbol variation display is executed on the second symbol display device 83 for 30 seconds for both the hit variation pattern and the deviation variation pattern. In addition, the normal symbol variation display is executed for 3 seconds on the second symbol display device 83 for both the variation variation pattern and the variation variation pattern for the high probability of the ordinary symbol. As the variation pattern of the normal symbol, one type of variation pattern is set for each of the low probability and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  The normal symbol stop type command 202g is used to set whether to turn on “O” or “X” as the stop symbol (second symbol) after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished. It is a command. If the normal symbol win / fail determination result is a hit, a normal symbol stop type command 202g for turning on “O” indicating the hit of the normal symbol is set. On the other hand, if the result of determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct is out, a common symbol stop type command 202g for turning on “x” indicating that the normal symbol is out is set.

  When the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed with “◯” indicating a normal symbol hit, the first entrance 64 is “0.2 seconds ×× when the normal symbol has a low probability. It is opened only once. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) at the high probability of the normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened “one second × twice”. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes “3 seconds → 30 seconds” much longer than when the normal symbol has a low probability, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a high probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened “only twice per second” when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). The update is repeated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 9, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 24), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 23) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a probability change flag. 203e, an hour and middle counter 203f, a card balance storage area 203g, and another storage area 203h.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas has a special per-random number counter C1, Each value of the special hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) where winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when a ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the start winning, a big hit lottery of the original special symbol Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3). The prediction is described as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the determination result from the winning information command and stores it as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 233.

  The winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is mainly stored in a special symbol for the player in the hold change process (FIG. 30, S1608) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 described later. This is used to notify whether there is a big hit on hold. Further, in the present embodiment, it is used for notifying whether there is a big hit in the hold, but not limited to this, the winning information includes the variation pattern and stop type in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. It may be stored and notified about the hold of the special symbol that will be reached, or may be used as appropriate for other effects.

  Similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a normal random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for a normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the holding first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, and as in the case of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other reserved areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which data is packed into a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. This special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to an initial value of zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. Addition is performed (see S404 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 16).

  The value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 16 and S405 in FIG. 18). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and the variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, it is possible to correct the deviation by the next reserved ball number command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 lights the reserved ball number symbol of the second symbol display device 83 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable symbol display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero. Each time the ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 19).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, the normal random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. It is not performed (S603 of FIG. 20: No).

  The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (a special symbol high probability state). The probability variation flag 203e is displayed when the special symbol variation process (FIG. 16, S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines that the lottery result of the special symbol to be stopped is a big hit. If it is determined that it is B, it is set to ON (S213 in FIG. 16). On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is A, it is set to off (S214 in FIG. 16). The probability variation flag 203e is set to off when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized. In addition, the system is configured to be backed up when a power interruption occurs.

  The hour / minute counter 203f is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the short / medium counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110 and the special symbol determined to be a big win is stopped and displayed, the big hit type is a big hit A If it is, 100 is set to the hour / middle counter (S214 in FIG. 16).

  The card balance storage area 203g is a storage area for storing information on the card balance inserted in the card reading unit 300 based on the card extraction signal output from the payout control device 111. The card balance storage area 203g stores an initial value of 0 when the RAM 203 is initialized. When there is a difference between the balance information indicated by the display information of the balance indicator 41 indicated by the received card extraction signal and the value of the card balance storage area 203g, the value of the card balance storage area 203g is based on the received card extraction signal. It is updated with the value of the balance information.

  The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines that the card is inserted in the card reading unit 300 when the balance information having a value greater than 0 is stored in the card balance storage area 203g. Also, display information on the balance indicator 41 indicating that no card is inserted (in this embodiment, the first LED 41a is "-", the second LED 41b is "-", and the third LED 41c is "-" "--- When the card extraction signal indicating that “is displayed” is received, the initial value of 0 is stored in the card balance storage area 203g.

  The other storage area 203h is a storage area in which various other counter values, other flags, and the like that are necessary when the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 controls the pachinko machine 10 are appropriately stored.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, the extraction signal line of the balance display 41, the card reading unit 300, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The balance indicator 41 that displays the card balance of the card inserted in the card reading unit 300 is configured by arranging three 7-segment LEDs in a line as shown in FIG. It is a 7-segment LED indicating the position, the first LED 41a disposed on the left side, the 7-segment LED indicating the thousandth position of the balance, the second LED 41b disposed in the center, and the 7-segment LED indicating the hundredth position of the balance. It is comprised by 3rd LED41c arrange | positioned on the right side. Each 7-segment LED is composed of seven segments, segment Ma to segment Mg, and one signal line is connected to each segment so that each segment can be turned on independently. .

  The signal lines connecting the card reading unit 300 and the balance display 41 are provided with extraction means (LDa to LDc) (in this embodiment, phototransistors) for extracting signals for lighting each segment. Each signal extracted by the extraction means (LDa to LDc) is input to the input / output port 215 of the payout control device 111. The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 outputs the signal input to the input / output port 215 to the main control device 110 as it is for the same control signal for every execution cycle (in this embodiment, every 2 ms). Is configured to do.

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 outputs the signals extracted by the extraction means (LDa to LDc) to the main control device 110 with the same contents as those input to the input / output port 215. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111 may be configured to generate a dedicated command based on each input signal.

  Further, in the present embodiment, seven signal lines are connected to each of the extraction means (LDa to LDc) to the payout control device 202, and a total of 21 signal lines are connected. First, an IC to which a signal output for each extraction means (LDa to LDc) is input is provided, and seven signal lines output in common from each IC are connected to the payout control device 111. The payout control device 111 is provided with a chip selector for designating the IC, and three signal lines connected from the chip selector to each IC are connected. Therefore, ten signal lines are connected from the IC to the payout control device 111, and the number of signal lines connected to the payout control device 111 can be reduced. The IC may be provided on a relay board or the like, or may be provided on a board of the balance indicator 41. When it is provided on the substrate of the balance indicator 41, it is possible to connect to each IC by a printed line, and it is possible to reduce troubles such as harness connection. Further, an IC may be provided in the payout control device 202 so that the number of harnesses between the main control device 201 and the payout control device 111 is reduced.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). In addition, the firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). The display control device 114 controls the display mode setting of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the password is input and set, and the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Or the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the contents of the effect at the time of super reach, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a control program necessary for the MPU 221 to execute control, various data, and the like. In addition, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a secondary card information storage area 223e, and a return are returned. At least a lock flag 223f, a handle counter 223g, a password storage area 223h, a secondary return button flag 223i, a lottery counter 223j, a card return effect flag 223k, a customer waiting counter 223m, and another storage area 223n are provided. ing.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In this pachinko machine 10, when a start winning is made in the main controller 110, from each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start win, Various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the various pieces of predicted information are The control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the result of the determination of the winning / failure determination is extracted as winning information from the various information notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Is remembered. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Thus, the counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of balls to be held (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64, or in the main controller 110, variation display in a special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1508 in FIG. 28). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for lighting the reserved ball number symbol in the second symbol display device 83.

  The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1502 in FIG. 28), and is turned off when setting of variation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1602 in FIG. 29). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1505 in FIG. 28), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1616 in FIG. 29).

  The slave card information storage area 223e receives the card information command (see S704 in FIG. 21) output from the main controller 110 based on the signal extracted by the extraction means (LDa to LDc). This is a storage area for storing the card balance indicated by the card information command. The slave card information storage area 223e is set to 0 when the gaming machine is initialized.

  The return lock flag 223f is a flag indicating whether a return button 42, which will be described later, is set to be valid (valid) or invalid (whether it is invalid). When the return button 42 is invalidated and the player operates the return button 42, if the card is not returned from the card reading unit 300, the return lock flag 223f is set to ON. On the other hand, in a state where the return button 42 is activated and the player operates the return button 42 to return the card from the card reading unit 300, the return lock flag 223f is set to OFF. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the return button 42 is enabled and set, and the return lock flag 223f is set to OFF.

  The handle counter 223g is a counter that is incremented (updated) one by one when the player releases the operation handle 51 (the handle sensor 51a is in an off state) (see S1809 in FIG. 32). When the handle sensor 51a is turned on, the value of the handle counter 223g is reset to zero. That is, the handle count 223g is a counter for measuring the time when the player releases the hand from the operation handle 51, and it is possible to determine the time when the player releases the hand from the operation handle 51 based on the value of the counter. it can.

  The password storage area 223h is a storage area for storing a password for switching between invalidation and validation of the return button 42. Although details will be described later, a 4-digit password arbitrarily determined by the player operating the frame button 22 on the password setting screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored (see S2023 in FIG. 35). ). On the other hand, when a password is stored in the password storage area 223h, the frame button 22 is operated on the password input screen displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the same password stored in the password storage area 223g. Is reset to 0 (S2029 in FIG. 35). The password storage area 223h stores “0” which is an initial state when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized. Also, if a power interruption occurs, it is backed up.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is reset when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized. Therefore, if the player forgets the password, a store clerk is called and the pachinko machine 10 is initialized. The card can be returned by getting it. In the present embodiment, the password is initialized when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a dedicated password initialization switch may be provided. The password initialization switch can be initialized by operating the game store with a key, thereby preventing the password from being initialized illegally. Also, by providing a dedicated initialization switch, there is no need to initialize the pachinko machine 10, and the password can be initialized without initializing the gaming state or the like. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 10 during the jackpot or probability change game is initialized, it is possible to initialize the password and validate the return button 42 even in a state where it is disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, the card can be returned to the player at an early stage, and the player can be prevented from forgetting to return the card.

  The sub return button flag 223i is a flag that is set to ON when a card is inserted in the card reading unit 300 and the return button 42 is operated in a state where the return button 42 is activated (FIG. 31). S1709). On the other hand, if it is determined that the return button 42 has not been operated, it is set to OFF (see S1710 in FIG. 31). With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the player has operated the return button 42 in order to return the card inserted in the card reading unit 300.

  If the special symbol variation display mode received from the main controller 110 is a jackpot variation display mode, the lottery counter 223j is in a state where a card is inserted and the return button 42 is activated. It is a counter value for determining whether to execute the return variation display mode. The lottery counter 223j is a counter value that is repeatedly updated in the range of “0 to 99”. Is done. The lottery counter 223j is incremented by 1 each time the command output process (FIG. 26, S1302) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed. The value is updated to 0. In the state where the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the lottery counter 223j is set to 0, which is an initial value.

  Although the details will be described later, as shown in FIG. 4B, the return variation display mode is a variation in which the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is output from the main controller 110. This is a dedicated variable display mode in which the display mode of the variable display mode is changed by causing the player to operate the return button 42 in the middle of the variable display mode, which is different from the variable display mode indicated by the pattern command. This return fluctuation display mode is set with the same fluctuation time as the fluctuation display mode indicated by the fluctuation pattern command output from main controller 110.

  The card return effect flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not a return variation display mode has been determined. This card return effect flag 223k is set to ON when the return variation display mode is determined (S1613 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, when the jackpot game is started, when it is determined that the variation display mode indicated by the variation pattern command received from main controller 110 is not the jackpot variation display mode, it is set to off. In the state where the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

  The customer waiting counter 223m is a counter for measuring a period during which the variation of the special symbol is stopped (a period in which a game ball does not enter the first entrance 64 and a lottery game is not executed). The customer waiting counter 223m is updated one by one based on the fact that the variation of the special symbol is stopped (S1402 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is changing, the initial value is reset to zero. When the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the initial value is set to 0.

  The other storage area 223n is a storage area in which other various data necessary for the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 to execute various controls of the pachinko machine 10, various other flags, and the like are stored.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 28) of the audio lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113 receives a return signal output to the card reading unit from the return button 42 for returning the card inserted in the card reading unit 300 provided on the front frame 14. The return extraction signal extracted by the return extraction means 42a is input.

  In addition, the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113 also receives signals from a ball removal button sensor 52a for detecting the operation of the ball removal button 52, a human sensor 400 provided on the front frame 14, and a break button 500, respectively. It is configured to be entered.

  The electrical connection between the card reading unit 300 and the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. The card reading unit 300 and the pachinko machine 10 connect a connector configured by a plurality of signal lines from the card reading unit 300 to a card reading unit connection board (not shown) provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Are electrically connected. As shown in FIG. 11, a signal (DC 24 V) generated by a power supply device 115 provided in the pachinko machine 10 is used as a power source of signals necessary for exchange between the card reading unit 300 and the pachinko machine 10. It is supplied to the card reading unit 300 side. The supplied voltage is input to the power supply circuit J1 of the card reading unit 300, generates a voltage (VL) of DC18V from the input DC24V, and outputs it to the pachinko machine 10 side via the card reading unit connection board. To do.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the voltage (VL) of DC18V output from the card reading unit 300 is used as a driving voltage for the ball lendable LED 40a, the balance display 41, a phototransistor for extracting a signal, and the like. It is also used as a signal for the pachinko machine 10 to recognize the connection with the card reading unit 300. Further, although not shown, the power supply circuit J1 of the card reading unit 300 generates each voltage necessary for the operation of each part of the card reading unit 300 in addition to the voltage (VL) of DC18V. To supply.

  Although not shown, the card reading unit 300 is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU temporarily stores a ROM, which is a nonvolatile memory storing various control programs executed by the MPU, fixed value data, and the like, and various data, etc., when executing the control program stored in the ROM. In addition, a random access memory and other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. The MPU is connected to a bus line including an address bus and a data bus, and this bus line is connected to the input / output port N1 shown in FIG. In addition to this bus line, the card input lamp 301, the money amount setting button 302, the fraction display button 303, the connection direction display lamp 304, the card insertion lamp 306, and the card insertion slot 306 are inserted into the input / output port N1. A reader / writer (not shown) for reading a card (such as a magnetic card or an IC card) is connected.

  This reader / writer includes a magnetic head having a reader function for reading money amount information and the like from the card inserted into the card insertion 306 and a writer function for writing money amount information of the balance amount after use to the card. ing. When the amount information of the balance amount of the card inserted by the reader / writer is read, it is determined that the card is being inserted. Further, when the balance amount newly written to the card by the reader / writer becomes “0”, the card inserted from the card insertion slot 306 is forcibly forced from the card insertion slot 306 by an actuator (not shown). Discharged.

  The card reading unit 300 outputs signals for lighting the 7-segment LEDs 41a to 41c of the balance indicator 41 provided on the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10, respectively, with three phototransistors S1 and seven phototransistors S2. Are output to the pachinko machine 1 side through a predetermined cycle (for example, every 1 ms). For example, when the ball lending button 43 is operated and a ball for 500 yen is paid out, the signal is switched so that the balance display is turned on when the payout is completed and the balance display is subtracted by 500 yen.

  Three phototransistors S1 are provided corresponding to the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c of the balance indicator 41, respectively. The seven phototransistors S2 are provided corresponding to the seven segments Ma to Mg constituting the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c, respectively.

  For example, if the phototransistor S2 corresponding to the segment Md is turned on while the phototransistor S1 corresponding to the first LED 41a at the hundreds position of the balance indicator 41 is turned on, the LED of the segment Md of the first LED 41a of the balance indicator 41 is turned on. Lights up. That is, “-” is displayed on the first LED 41a of the balance display 41 (see FIG. 7). Further, if all the seven phototransistors S2 are turned on while the phototransistor S1 corresponding to the tenth second LED 41b of the balance indicator 41 is turned on, the seven segments Ma˜ of the second LED 41b of the balance indicator 41 are turned on. All the Mg lights up and “8” is displayed on the second LED 41b.

  12 extracts signals output from the card reading unit 300 by the phototransistors LDa to LDc (extraction means) in order to turn on the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c of the balance indicator 41 in FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a configuration of branching and outputting to an input / output port 215 of the payout control device 111. The phototransistors LDa to LDc used here are provided with resistors on the collector side to prevent a problem that the current flowing from the collector to the emitter becomes too large and short-circuits. The emitter side is connected to the ground. In the present embodiment, the emitter side is connected to the ground, and the signal is activated by drawing current. However, as shown as a modification of the phototransistors LDa to LDc in FIG. A configuration may be adopted in which a signal is activated by a configuration in which a current is supplied to the device 111 side.

  The phototransistor LDa is for extracting (branching) signals for lighting the segments Ma to Mg of the first LED 41a of the balance indicator 14, and corresponds to each of the seven segments Ma to Mg. A total of seven are provided one by one.

  The phototransistor LDb corresponds to the seven segments Ma to Mg of the second LED 41b, and the phototransistor LDc corresponds to the seven segments Ma to Mg of the third LED 41c, respectively, in the same manner as the phototransistor LDa. Seven are provided. The phototransistors LDa to LDc are respectively provided on the LED substrates on which the 7-segment LEDs 41a to 41c of the balance indicator 41 are provided. In the present embodiment, the phototransistor is used as the extracting means. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any other means can be used as long as it can extract other signals. For example, it may be detected from the outside of the signal line whether a current has flowed due to a change in the magnetic field, or may be detected by directly branching a signal.

  As described above, the phototransistors LDa to LDc extract (branch) the lighting signals of the respective segments Ma to Mg, so that the phototransistors LDa to LDc transmit signals with light, so there is no electrical wiring. An illegal electrical signal can be prevented from being output to the pachinko machine 10 side via the reading unit 300. Therefore, it is possible to reduce damage caused by fraudulent acts made by illegally changing electrical wiring. Note that the connection (signal transmission / reception) between the card reading unit 300 and the pachinko machine 1 is performed via a photodiode, and an illegal electrical signal is not transmitted / received from the card reading unit 300. In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 side receives the signal output from the card reading unit 300 using a photodiode, the phototransistor diode cannot be turned on from the pachinko machine 10 side, and the pachinko machine 10 It is difficult to output an illegal signal from the side to the card reading unit 300 side. Therefore, the fraud in which an illegal signal is output to the card reading unit 300 from the pachinko machine 10 side can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. When power is applied to the pachinko machine 10, the card reading unit 300 is supplied with power from the pachinko machine 10 via the power supply device 115 to the power circuit on the card unit 300 side. A power supply circuit supplies the necessary power. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit, the card reading unit 300 rises based on a predetermined program, and when normal control is possible, the player is informed that the card can be inserted into the card insertion slot 306. The card usable lamp 300 to be notified is turned on. When a card is inserted into the card insertion slot 306, it is read whether the card is normal. If it is normal, the card insertion lamp 305 is turned on and the card based on the balance inserted into the balance display 41 is displayed. Controlled to display balance. The lighting control of the balance indicator 41 is as described above. Further, the operation of the ball lending button 43 and the return button 42 provided on the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 is set to be acceptable (a state in which the received signal is determined to be valid).

  From the card reading unit 300 to the pachinko machine 10, a unit preparation signal BO for indicating to the pachinko machine 10 that the card reading unit 300 is in a lending state, and from the card reading unit 300 to the pachinko machine 10, In order to light up the lending instruction completion signal YQ which is a signal indicating a lending execution request and a lending execution instruction, and the lendable LED 40a for informing that the player is provided with the front frame 14 that the lending is possible. The ball lending lighting signal RO is output to the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 ready signal PO indicating to the card reading unit 300 that the pachinko machine 10 is in a ball lending state and the lending output from the card reading unit 300 to the card reading unit 300. A ball lending completion signal ED indicating a response to the ball lending execution request of the instruction completion signal YQ and the end of the ball lending operation performed for the ball lending execution instruction of the lending instruction completion signal YQ (end of lending of the ball lending); A card return signal HS that is output when the return button 42 provided on the front frame 14 is operated, and a ball lending operation signal KS that is output when the ball lending button 43 is operated are output. Yes.

  With reference to FIG. 13, the electrical connection between the card return button 42 and the card reading unit 300 will be described. On the pachinko machine 10 side, the card return signal HS signal is extracted by the return extraction means 42a (phototransistor), and the extracted signal is input to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. It has become. Further, on the pachinko machine 10 side, a photo MOS relay is provided as a changeover switch (switching means) 42b on the card reading unit 300 side rather than the return extraction means 42a. The signal line between the card reading unit 300 and the return button 42 is configured to be switched between a disconnected state and a connected state. In the present embodiment, the signal from the sound lamp control device 113 to the changeover switch (photo MOS relay) 42b is active and the return button 42 is activated, that is, the signal line is connected, In a non-active state, the return button 42 is disabled, that is, the signal line is set to a disconnected state.

  Between the return extraction means (phototransistor) 42a and the changeover switch (photo MOS relay) 42b, the voice lamp control device 113 activates the card return signal HS even when the return button 42 is not operated. A forced return signal is input. The return extraction means 42a and the changeover switch b are provided on the same substrate, and are connected to the return button 42 and provided on the front frame 14.

  As described above, since the card return signal HS output from the return button 42 of the pachinko machine 10 can be extracted, it can be determined whether the player has operated the card return button 42. In addition, since the signal line that connects the return button 42 and the card reading unit 300 can be switched between a disconnected state and a connected state by a signal from the sound lamp control device 113 by the changeover switch 42b, the return button 42 is disabled. You can switch between enabling and enabling. Therefore, even when a game is played with the card inserted into the card reading unit 300, it is possible to prevent the card from being stolen by disabling the card return button 42.

  The return button 42 is electrically connected directly to the card reading unit 300 provided outside the pachinko machine 10, but the control device for the pachinko machine 10 of the return button 42 (in this embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113). ) Is connected via a phototransistor and is not directly electrically connected. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized electric signal from being output from the outside of the pachinko machine 10 to the control device of the pachinko machine 10 via the return button 42. Further, the changeover switch 42b is also constituted by a photo MOS relay, thereby preventing the control device from being directly and electrically connected to the outside. In addition, by using a phototransistor, it is possible to transmit a one-way signal that is output from the side of the phototransistor that turns on the diode, so that an illegal signal is output from the other (non-diode side). Can be prevented. Therefore, an illegal signal can be prevented from being output to one side.

  In the present embodiment, a phototransistor is used as the return extraction unit 42a. In the embodiment, a photo MOS relay is used as the changeover switch 42b. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a relay or the like. Good. In the present embodiment, the return extraction signal is input to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. You may comprise so that it may input.

  FIG. 14A is a block diagram simply showing the electrical connection between the card reading unit 300 and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. FIG. 2B is a diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to Modification 1 of the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, a card is inserted into the card reading unit 300, or information on the card balance is extracted by extracting signals for lighting the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c of the balance indicator 41. The output is made to the control device 111. Instead, in the first modification, the signal is output to the main controller 110. Further, a control signal related to ball lending output from the card reading unit 300 is also output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is configured to output a pachinko-side preparation signal PO or the like to the card reading unit 300 by determining whether or not the ball lending is possible based on the control signal output from the payout control device 111. ing. Further, when the MPU of the main control device 110 receives a control signal from the card reading unit 300, the MPU outputs a signal corresponding to the signal to the payout control device 111.

  The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines whether a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 based on signals output from the phototransistors LDa to LDc. Then, based on the determined information, a notification process similar to that of the first embodiment is performed. With this configuration, card insertion information and card balance information are directly input to the main control device 110, so that control can be performed promptly.

  In the present embodiment, the control signal related to the ball rental output from the card reading unit 300 is output to the main control device 110. However, the control signal is output to the payout control device 111 as in the first embodiment, and the photo Only the signals output from the transistors LDa to LDc may be output to the main controller 110. With this configuration, the control related to ball lending can be performed regardless of the instruction from the main control device 110 by the payout control device 111, and the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Next, FIG.2 (c) is the figure which showed the electrical structure of the pachinko machine 10 in the modification 2 of 1st Embodiment. In the second modification, a control signal related to ball lending output from the card reading unit 300 is output to the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113, and a signal obtained by extracting the signals output from the phototransistors LDa to LDc is sound. It differs from the first embodiment in that it is output to the lamp control device 113. With this configuration, the audio lamp control device 113 directly receives signals output from the phototransistors LDa to LDc, and the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is based on the card information indicated by the received signal. By performing notification similar to that of the first embodiment, the main control device 110 does not need to perform control for notification, and the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. Further, since the control signal is not output from the sound lamp control device 113 to the main control device 110, since the signal output from the card reading unit 300 is not output to the main control device 110, fraud can be reduced. .

  In this embodiment, the control signal related to the ball rental output from the card reading unit 300 is output to the sound lamp control device 113. However, the signal related to the ball rental is the same as in the first embodiment. As a configuration for outputting to 111, only a signal output from the phototransistors LDa to LDc may be output to the sound lamp control device 113. With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 does not need to output a control signal related to ball lending to the payout control device 111, and the control load on the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  Next, FIG.2 (d) is the figure which showed the electrical structure of the pachinko machine 10 in the modification 3 of 1st Embodiment. In the third modification, after the signals output from the phototransistors LDa to LDc are output to the payout control device 111, the signals output from the phototransistors LDa to LDc from the payout control device 111 to the sound lamp control device 113 are displayed. This is different from the first embodiment in that the signal shown is output. With this configuration, since the signal output from the payout control device 111 is not output to the main control device 110, fraud with respect to the main control device 110 can be suppressed. Further, a signal indicating a signal output from the phototransistors LDa to LDc is output to the sound lamp control device 113 without going through the main control device 110, and the card information is discriminated by the sound lamp control device 113, so that the first implementation is performed. Since the notification similar to the embodiment is executed, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, in the first embodiment and the first to third modifications of the first embodiment, the enclosed pachinko machine (pachinko machine in which a game ball is not directly paid out to a player and a game is played with the game ball stored in the game machine) Can also be used. In the enclosed pachinko machine, a configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 extracts the card information of the card reading unit 300 and uses it for notifying and producing, but also outputting it to a hall computer or a management computer is conceivable.

  In addition, in 1st Embodiment and the modifications 1-3 of 1st Embodiment, it was set as the structure which uses the card reading unit 300 which uses a card | curd, but it is not restricted to this, The prepaid medium in which money amount information (valuable value) was memorize | stored For example, it is possible to use a reading unit using, for example, a coin having a built-in IC chip or a stick.

  In addition, in the first embodiment and the first to third modifications of the first embodiment, the card reading unit 300 can be used for a slot game machine (rotating game machine) that lends medals. It is.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, as another configuration, an optical sensor for detecting the light amount of the 7-segment LED of the balance indicator 41 is provided in the frame of the pachinko machine 10, and the signal of the optical sensor is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. The card information may be notified by inputting into the card information. The balance information of the card information is stored in advance with the amount of light corresponding to the balance display, and based on the detected amount of light, the balance is determined, or the light sensor is changed to an image recognition sensor to recognize the image. Thus, the balance of the card may be detected by recognizing the balance display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from outputting a signal for performing fraud through the card reading unit 300. Moreover, since control can be performed based on the actually displayed information, more accurate notification can be performed. Also, the balance display is detected from the back side, the top side, or the surroundings of the LED display, and no sensor is arranged on the front side, so that the visibility of the player's balance display is not impaired. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description of the first embodiment will be continued. The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81. Based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the special control (third symbol) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the display of fluctuation (fluctuation effect) and the like. Since this display control device 114 is already known, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 15 to 36. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the special initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the special initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the special initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the RAM 203. Store in the corresponding buffer area.

  Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the normal hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are set to the maximum values (in this embodiment, 399 respectively). , 99, 99, 239), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing with the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is performed. Processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. After executing the through gate passing process, the card process is executed (S108), then the firing control process is executed (S109), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S110). The timer interrupt process ends. Although details of the card processing will be described later, processing for setting various types of information on the card inserted into the card reading unit 300 is executed based on the extraction signal output from the payout control device 111. The firing control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of the firing of the sphere. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation processing (FIG. 16, S104), first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. If it has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the big hit according to the value of the special hit type counter C2 Whether it will be A or big hit B is determined.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process is as follows. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), it is determined which of the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B) is the jackpot type (S211). If the jackpot is A, 100 is set to the hour / minute counter 203f of the RAM 203 (S214). If the jackpot type is jackpot B, the probability variation flag 203e is set to ON (S213). Then, the special symbol jackpot start is set (S215), and the process ends. When the start of special symbol jackpot is set by the processing of S215, the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed, and the jackpot effect is started.

  In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1. If it is above (S216: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the hour / minute counter 203e (S217), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / middle counter 203f is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 16) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and is an execution area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the changed effect.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired ( S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on (S302). The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state. If the probability variation flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol certain variation state. If the flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state.

  If the probability change flag 203e is on (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state, the probability variation determination determination flag 203h is turned on (S303), and the process proceeds to S304. In the process of S304, based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S304). ). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with 30 random numbers stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, ten random numbers “0 to 9” are set as the special symbol jackpot random numbers, and the value of the special random number counter C1 matches the random number value to which these hits. In this case, it is determined that the jackpot is a special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S306.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the probability variation flag 203e is off (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301, Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is jackpot is acquired (S305). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the three random number values stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability. As the random number value that is a special symbol jackpot, one of “7” is set, and when the value of the special hit random number counter C1 matches the random number value that hits the special symbol jackpot It is determined that If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S306.

  Then, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the process of S304 or S305 is a special symbol jackpot (S306). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S306: Yes), Based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode for the big hit is set (S307). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random value stored in the special symbol big hit type table, and the two types of special big hits (big hit A, big hit) In B), the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that the jackpot A (15R normal jackpot, 100 times of time reduction), and in the range of “50 to 99”. If there is, it is determined that the jackpot B (15R probability variation jackpot) (see FIG. 10C).

  In the processing of S307, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern (variation display mode) at the time of jackpot is determined (S308). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S308, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like. For example, variation patterns for detachment are defined as “displacement (for a long time)”, “detachment (for a short time)”, “reason normal reach”, “reason superreach”, and “reason special reach”. ing.

  In the process of S306, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S306: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S309). In the processing of S309, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out.

  Here, the stop type is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed and the reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  When the processing of S308 or the processing of S310 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S308 or S310 is set (S311). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S312). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 24, S1000). Sent. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, start winning information processing (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 15), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 and there is a start winning. This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 18) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) in the first entrance 64 (S401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  And, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reservation balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserve ball number command by the process of S405, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203 special values. It stores in the first area among the empty reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, for the various counters acquired in the process of S406, based on the gaming state (low probability gaming state or high probability gaming state) at the start of variation, whether or not the special symbol is determined, the stop type, and the variation pattern to be selected Pre-fetching of the lottery result in the special symbol that predicts (S407).

  If the process of S407 predicts whether the lottery is a special symbol, a stop type (a jackpot type in the case of jackpot), and a variation pattern, then the predicted lottery is predicted, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S408).

  The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the result of the winning / notifying determination from the winning information command, and stores the information as winning information in the corresponding area of the winning information storage area 223a.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S501). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is showing the winning indication, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S504). If the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the processing of S506, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S508). The time reduction / intermediate counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S509). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first inlet 64 is released. This is to prevent the balls that are going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening 65a is not limited to the first winning opening even if the ball is prevented from entering the first winning opening 64 during the big hit of the special symbol. A lot of balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S509, if the special symbol is not big hit (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, so acquired in the process of S507. Based on the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 and the normal probability random number table for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 10D).

  In the process of S508, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S508: No), the process proceeds to S511. In the processing of S511, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the normal random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S507 and the low probability Based on the hourly normal symbol random number table, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 10D).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S510 or S511 is a normal symbol win (S512). If it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S512: Yes) The display mode for winning is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S514). It is determined whether or not (S515). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol is off In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S515, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in a special symbol big hit, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol. The opening period of the electric accessory attached to 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S614, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S514: No), the process proceeds to S517. In the process of S517, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of releases is set to 1 (S517), and the process proceeds to S519.

  If it is determined in step S512 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S512: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S518). In the process of S518, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S519, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S519), and if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S519: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 is detected. The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S519: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the first entrance 64 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S522). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S520 or the processing of S521 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the processing of S522 (S522: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S522 (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the “○” symbol as the second symbol is stopped in the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lighted display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S518, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). When the stop display is set by the process of S523, when the normal symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S513 or S518.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S524). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set (S525), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric power article is set by the processing of S525, when the electric power object opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed next, the electric character object opening / closing control is performed. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S516 or S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through-gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through-gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the second entrance 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the normal hit random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S602). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the second entrance 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is 4. If not less than this (S603: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the number of normal symbol reserved balls The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the normal random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the area (S605), and this process is terminated. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, card processing (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this card processing (S108). This card process (S108) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 15), and is generated based on the extraction signal extracted by the extraction means (LDa to LDc) output from the payout control device 111. This is a process for determining the balance of the card inserted in the card reading unit 300 from the card extraction signal and notifying the determined information to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the card processing (FIG. 21, S108), first, based on the card extraction signal output by the payout control device 111 received in the processing of S1003 of the main processing (FIG. 24, S1000) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, Display information of the balance display 41 is acquired (analyzed) (S701). It is determined whether there is a change in the card balance based on the value stored in the card balance storage area 203g and the display information acquired in the process of S701 (S702). When it is determined that there is a change in the card balance (S702: Yes), the balance information based on the acquired display information is stored (updated) in the card balance storage area 203g (S703). A card information command based on the card balance information stored in the card balance storage area 203g is generated (S704). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no change in the card balance (S702: No), this process ends.

  The card extraction signal output from the payout control device 111 is input to the input / output port of the main control device 110 as an 8-bit signal composed of eight signal lines. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 discriminates display information of the balance indicator 41 by discriminating the inputted card extraction signal composed of 8 bits. The card information command generated by the main controller 110 is composed of a 2-byte command, the upper byte is composed of a command indicating a command type (a command indicating a card balance), and the lower byte is composed of a command. It consists of commands that indicate card balance.

  As for the card extraction signal, although seven signal lines are respectively input from the extracting means LDa to LDc to the input / output port 215 of the payout control device 111, they are output to the main control device 110. The card extraction signal is composed of an 8-bit signal. This is because the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is based on the error display by setting the bit to ON when the balance indicator 41 displays an error for the upper 1 bit. The extracted signal can be easily identified. In the other 7 bits, signals extracted by the extraction means LDa to LDc are set. That is, the total number of signal lines connected from the extraction means LDa to LDc to the payout control device 111 is 21, and 8 card extraction signals are input from the payout control device 111 to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. This is a signal line. The payout control device 111 can identify each of the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c with the remaining 7 bits excluding the upper 1 bit based on the signals respectively input from the extraction means LDa to LDc, and the lighting mode of each segment. Generate an identifiable signal. For example, the light emission mode of each LED is a light emission mode (for example, “A” or the like) indicating numbers 0 to 9 and an error display, and “−” indicating that no card is inserted. The LED is configured to indicate the type of LED (any one of the first LED 41a to the third LED 41c) with 2 bits, and the signal corresponding to the light emission mode of the segment is configured with the remaining 5 bits. Further, as described above, the upper 1 bit is set to ON when the light emission mode indicates an error.

  Although omitted in the present embodiment, in the card processing, when a card extraction signal indicating that a display indicating an error is displayed on the balance display 41 is received, the signal indicating the error is externally transmitted to the hall computer. The output is made via a terminal (not shown). Further, the type of error display displayed on the balance display 41 may be determined, and an error signal corresponding to the error type may be output to a hall computer or the like via an external terminal. With this configuration, when the player tries to lend a ball using, for example, a fake bill, the card reading unit 300 displays an error display corresponding to the lending on the balance display 41. The game store can detect and deal with fraud without being noticed by the player.

  In this way, a signal that causes the card reading unit 300 to turn on the balance indicator 41 is extracted by the extraction means LDa to LDc, and the information is output to the main control device 110 as a card extraction signal via the payout control device 111. Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can determine whether a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 based on the information. Further, when there is a card balance, it is possible to accurately determine the amount of money and accurately notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the card balance. Further, even when the card balance changes, the card balance is newly displayed on the balance display 41 by the card reading unit 300, so that information based on the display is notified to the main controller 110. Based on the information, a new card information command can be generated and notified to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, based on the value of the card balance storage area 203g, a special symbol variation start process (FIG. 17, S208) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is configured to select the type of jackpot variation pattern or outlier variation pattern. May be. By configuring in this way, for example, when the card balance decreases, it is possible to select a super-reach fluctuation pattern with a high probability of being selected in the case of a hit such as outlier super-reach, so that the winning may be close. By making the player expect, it is possible to add money to the game even after the card balance has been spent. In addition, when the card balance is large (when it is larger than the set value), it is configured so that a variation pattern with a short variation time (dynamic display time) can be easily selected, so that the game can be efficiently performed and the card balance is When it becomes less (when it becomes less than the set value), it is easy to select a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time, so that it becomes a big hit such as reach or super reach. You may comprise so that the fluctuation pattern which is easy to be selected becomes easy to be selected. With this configuration, it is possible to play a game while expecting a big hit while shortening the game time.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 15) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 16) or the start winning process (see FIG. 18) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in S408 of the start winning process (FIG. 18, S105) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (S1004) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal, and the card extraction signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 outputs a card extraction signal based on a signal obtained by the card reading unit 300 extracting a signal for lighting the balance on the balance display 41 by the extraction means (LDa to LDc). In the present embodiment, the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is configured to output the signal extracted by the extraction means (LDa to LDc) as it is to the main control device 110 as a card extraction signal. Next, in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, a jackpot control process for executing a jackpot effect and opening or closing a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 22), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, a special symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the special symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S308 or the processing of S310 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 17), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed on the symbol display device 37. Start. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the special symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 17) or the process of S310 is completed, the first symbol display device 37 is used. In the display mode set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 17), the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol display device. 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, normal symbol display update processing for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the normal symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S520 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 19) or the process of S521, the variable symbol display device 83 starts the variable display. . Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, the normal symbol display update process is executed in the second symbol display device 83 when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 19). The variation display is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S513 or the processing of S518 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 19). indicate.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the processes after S1001 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009: No), the special process is not performed until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the special initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the special initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the special initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but varies. Therefore, the special initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated using the remaining time, whereby the special initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special per random number The initial value of the counter C1 and the initial value of the normal random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 22 has been executed, the power-off process after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S901), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 36, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S1318 is performed in this startup process due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”) (see FIG. 26 ) Is determined during execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 26, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 26), it executes a power-off process in S1318. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1318 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S1318 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, this start-up process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1318, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup process this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process in S1318, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1206). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1318 is executed (see S1320 in FIG. 26). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1318 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S1208. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1318 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1211), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1208 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and the interrupt permission is set. In step S1211, the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1209 is that when the process from S1204 to S1208 is reached via the process in S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S1301 was executed (S1301). If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes in S1302 to S1310. In S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1302 to S1310 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1311, the variable display setting process of S1312, and the process of updating the counter value in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the processing of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1303 to S1317 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1308 described later are set (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a waiting-for-waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process (S1305), when the time when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, the setting of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is performed as a command. To the display control device 114. In addition, referring to FIG. 27, details will be described later, but a process for executing setting of a password setting screen and a password input screen for switching between enabling and disabling of the return button 42 is also executed. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, the input of whether or not each operation button of the frame button 22 operated by the player to enhance the production effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process of setting to perform an effect or control process corresponding to the case. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1309 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1311). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1312, the card effect control process is executed (S1313). The card effect control process (S1313) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 31. When a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300, Processing for forcibly discharging the card or determining whether the return button 42 has been operated is executed.

  When the processing of S1313 is executed, card information processing for executing card information inserted into the card reading unit 300 and processing for preventing forgetting to return the card from the card reading unit 300 is executed ( S1314). Details of the card notification process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1314 is executed, when the return variation display mode is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 is operated based on the operation (pressing) of the return button 42. Then, the card return effect process for executing the process of displaying the fixed notification mode is executed (S1315). The details of the card return effect process (S1315) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1315 is executed, control related to password input is performed based on the operation of the frame button 22 on the password input screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for switching between enabling and disabling of the return button 42. A password input process for executing is executed (S1316). Details of the password input process (S1316) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1316 is executed, when the break button 500 is operated by the player, a break process for executing a process for invalidating the return button 42 is executed (S1317). Details of the break process (S1317) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1317 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1318). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1315 (S1318: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1317), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1320). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1321), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1318 (S1318: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1319), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1319: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1319: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the customer waiting effect process (S1305) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting effect process (S1305). This customer waiting effect process (S1305) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, after a special symbol fluctuates and stops for a predetermined time. When the time has elapsed, processing for displaying a password input screen or a password setting screen for enabling or disabling the return button 42 on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In the customer waiting effect process (S1305), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is stopped (that is, a lottery game is not being performed) on the third symbol display device 81 (S1401). When it is determined by the third symbol display device 81 that the special symbol is stopped (S1401: Yes), the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is incremented by 1 and updated. Since the customer waiting effect process (S1305) is normally executed at a period of 1 ms, it is possible to determine the time when the special symbol is stopped and displayed with the value of the counter value as a unit of ms. ing. It is determined whether a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1403). Here, whether or not a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 is determined based on a card information command received from the main controller 110 in a command determination process (FIG. 28, S1311) described later. Based on the data about the card balance stored in the card information storage area 223e, if the balance is greater than 0, it is determined that a card with a balance is inserted. That is, it is determined whether the card balance stored in the slave card information storage area 223e is a value greater than zero.

  When it is determined that a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1403: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is a value of 5 seconds or more ( S1404). If it is determined that the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is less than 5 seconds, the process of S1415 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is 5 seconds or more (S1404: Yes), it is determined whether there is data set in the password storage area 223h (S1405). Here, the password is stored in the password storage area 223h when a password is set by the player in a password input process (FIG. 34, S1316) described later. That is, the fact that the password is stored in the password storage area 223h indicates that the return button 42 has been invalidated by setting the password.

  If it is determined that the password is stored in the password storage area 223h (S1405: Yes), the display password for displaying the password input screen (see FIG. 5B) on the third symbol display device 81 Generate (set) input commands. On the other hand, if it is determined that no password is stored in the password storage area 223h (that is, the initial value 0 is stored in the password storage area 223m) (S1405: No), the customer waiting counter 223m It is determined whether the value is 30 seconds or more (S1407). When it is determined that the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is less than 30 seconds (S1407: No), a display for displaying a password setting screen (see FIG. 5A) on the third symbol display device 81 A password setting command is generated (set) (S1408).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the customer waiting counter 223m is 30 seconds or more (S1407: Yes), the characters “The return button has been disabled for crime prevention” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. For this purpose, a display lock notification command is generated (set) (S1409). A return button invalid signal for invalidating the return button 42 (a state in which no signal is output from the return button 42 even if the return button 42 is operated) is generated (S1410). A return lock flag 223f indicating that the return button 42 is invalidated is set to ON (S1411).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that a card with a balance is not inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1403: No), it is determined whether the customer waiting counter 223m has a value of 30 seconds or more (S1412). When it is determined that the customer waiting counter 223m has a value of 30 seconds or more, a display normal standby command for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is generated on the third symbol display device 81. (S1413). Further, if it is determined that the special symbol variation display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1401: No), the customer waiting counter 223m is reset (cleared) to the initial value 0 and set ( S1414).

  In the process of S1415, it is determined whether the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is within 30 seconds (S1415). When it is determined that the value of the customer waiting counter 223m is within 30 seconds (S1415: Yes), the subordinate return button flag i is set to ON (that is, the return button with the card inserted) 42 is operated) (S1416). If it is determined that the subordinate return button flag 223i is on (S1416: Yes), it is possible to download a wallpaper for displaying the title screen on the standby screen of a mobile phone or the like on the third symbol display device 81. A display two-dimensional code setting command for displaying a two-dimensional code is generated (set) (S1417). On the other hand, when it is determined that the customer waiting counter 223m has a value greater than 30 seconds (S1415: No), or when it is determined that the subordinate return button flag 223i is off (S1416: No), this The process ends.

  In this way, when a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300, the password input screen or the password setting screen is displayed when the special symbol is not changed for a predetermined time. Therefore, the player can be configured to set a password or start input without any particular operation by the player. In addition, when the return button 42 in which the password has already been set is disabled, the password input screen is displayed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed for a shorter time than when the password setting screen is displayed. Thus, when the player wants to activate the return button 42, it becomes possible to start inputting the password without waiting for a long time.

  Further, when it is determined that a card with a balance is inserted when the state where the special symbol is stopped exceeds a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds), the return button 42 is displayed. Since it is set to be forcibly invalidated, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to return the card and the card being stolen. In addition, when a card with a balance is not inserted, a standby display is displayed in which a normal title screen is displayed. Can be done against.

  In addition, when the card is returned by operating the return button 42 within a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds) after the special symbol is stopped with the balance card inserted, Since the two-dimensional code is displayed on the three-symbol display device 81 (a gaming privilege is given), the player operates the return button 42 within that time to finish the gaming bonus when the game is finished. I can try to get it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to return the card and returning home. In the present embodiment, a two-dimensional code is displayed as a gaming privilege. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific effect (for example, information on the pachinko machine 10 scheduled to be released in the future) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Etc.) may be displayed, or a number of prize balls may be provided.

  Next, a command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1311). This command determination processing (S1311) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1501). When the variation pattern command is received (S1501: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1502), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1503). Return to the main process. The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 29) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1501: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1504). When the stop type command is received (S1504: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1505), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1506). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 29) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1504: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1507). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1507: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). Is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1508). In the processing of S1508, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1508 is completed, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number-of-holding balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, the starting win is received. Is detected, or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110 by the processing of S1508. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1508 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1507, when the pending ball number command has not been received (S1507: No), it is next determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1509). Then, when a winning information command is received (S1509: Yes), the winning / failing determination result indicated by the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding area of the winning information storage area 223a (S1510). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the main controller 110 acquires the values of the counters C1 to C3, and the acquired counters. Each value of C1 to C3 is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Moreover, as soon as each value of each counter C1-C3 is acquired in the main controller 110, the original lottery is obtained from each acquired value of each counter C1-C3 separately from the original special symbol jackpot lottery. Various kinds of information obtained when the above is performed is prefetched (predicted). When the main control device 110 finishes prefetching, a winning information command including various information obtained by prefetching (whether, stop type, variation pattern) is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  If the winning information command is not received in the processing of S1509 (S1509: No), it is next determined whether or not the card information command is received from the main control device 110 (S1511). When the card information command is received (S1511: Yes), the card balance information is stored in the slave card information storage area 223e based on the received card information command (S1512). On the other hand, if it is determined that a card information command has not been received (S1511: No), it is determined whether another command has been received, and processing corresponding to the received command is executed (S1513). ), The process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the variable display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1312). This variable display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S1312), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1601). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1601: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1615. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1601: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1602), and then the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S1503 of the command determination process (see FIG. 28). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1603).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1604). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1605). In the process of S1605, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1606.

  In the processing of S1606, it is determined whether the set display variation pattern command is a variation pattern command that is a big hit (S1606). If it is determined that the change pattern command is a deviation (S1606: No), the card return effect flag 223k is set to OFF (S1607). Thereafter, a pending change process is executed (S1608). The hold change process (S1608) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 30, but when the card return button 42 is operated when a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300, the change start is started. A process of changing the color and notifying the result of the determination as to whether or not the suspension is a hit is executed. After the pending change process (S1608), the process of S1615 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the set display variation pattern command is a variation pattern command that is a big hit (S1606: Yes), is a card with a balance inserted in the card reading unit 300? It is determined (S1609). When it is determined that a card with a balance is not inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1609: No), the processing of S1615 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1609: Yes), it is determined whether the return lock flag 223f is set to ON (S1610). When it is determined that the return lock flag 223f is off (S1610: No), the process of S1615 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the return lock flag 223f is on (S1610: Yes), the value of the lottery counter 223j is acquired (S1611). It is determined whether the acquired value of the lottery counter 223j is any one of “0-4” which is a winning value (S1612).

  If it is determined that the value of the acquired lottery counter 223j is out of place (S1612: No), the process of S1615 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the acquired lottery counter 223j is a win (S1612: Yes), the return variation display mode is changed to the variation pattern set in S1604 on the third symbol display device 81 and displayed. Is set to ON (S1613). A display card return effect command is generated (set) overwriting the display variation pattern command set in S1604.

  It is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1615). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1615: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1615: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1616), and then in the process of S1506 of the command determination process (see FIG. 28), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1617). Next, the stop type acquired in the process of S1617 is set as a display stop type command (S1618).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the hold change process (S1608) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the hold change process (S1608). This hold change process (S1608) is executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the card reading unit 300 has a balance. When the return button 42 is operated when the return button 42 is operated, if there is a big hit at the start of fluctuation, a process of displaying the result of the determination on the success / failure for the player by changing the display color of the hold is executed.

  In the hold change process (S1608), first, it is determined whether a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (that is, whether the value stored in the slave card information storage area 223e is greater than 0) ( S1621). If it is determined that a card with a balance is not inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1621: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S1621: Yes), the value of the special reserved ball number counter 223b is 1 or more (that is, the special symbol is reserved). Is stored) (S1622). If it is determined that the special symbol hold is 0 (S1622: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol hold is stored (S1622: Yes), it is determined whether the subordinate return button flag 223i is on (S1623). If it is determined that the sub return button flag 223i is off (S1623: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the secondary return button flag 223i is on (S1623: Yes), it is determined whether there is a winning hold among the pending winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. (S1624).

  If it is determined that all the suspensions have been released (S1624: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning hold is stored in the hold (S1624: Yes), it is displayed in a display color (in this embodiment, red) indicating to the player that the hold is a big win. A pending change command is generated (S1625).

  In this way, when the special symbol is a variation pattern that is a big hit of the special symbol, the return variation display mode is replaced with the variation pattern set by the main controller 110 by lottery when the third symbol display device 81 is variably displayed. Since the return variation display mode is displayed, the player can be informed that a big hit will be made at an early stage. Further, as shown in FIG. 4 (b), the return fluctuation display mode is based on the fact that the player is notified during the fluctuation of the special symbol so that the card return button 42 is operated and the return button 42 is operated. Since the effect of notifying the player that the game will be a big hit (early notification) is executed early, the player can return the card from the card reading unit 300 by operating the return button 42 at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to return the card. Furthermore, since the return variation display mode is a variation pattern that is a big hit, it often takes a while before the ball lending operation is required, so the ball lending operation is not performed for a long time, Forgetting to return the card can be prevented by forgetting that the remaining card is still inserted in the card reading unit 300.

  In addition, even when the variation pattern is not a big hit, the player can enjoy the return button 42 by operating the return button 42 so as to notify the result of the pending pre-reading, which is a gaming privilege. 42 can be operated, and the return button 42 can always be conscious. Therefore, the malfunction which forgets card return can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, when the timing of operating the return button 42 coincides with the timing of the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, it is configured to notify the hold prefetching, so that the hold prefetching result can be easily notified. However, it is configured so that the player can enjoy the operation at the same time, but not limited to that, the read-ahead is based on the operation at any timing. You may comprise so that the result of this may be alert | reported. Further, the present invention is not limited to the result of prefetching, and may be configured to notify the determined variation pattern type (reach, super reach, etc.), or may be configured to display a specific character. However, it may be configured such that game points (privileges such as increasing the number of characters displayed by accumulating points) are given to the player.

  Next, the card effect control process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the card effect control process (S1313). This card effect control process (S1313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is controlled to forcibly eject the card at the start of the jackpot. Or the return button 42 executes processing for determining whether or not the card with the balance is operated in a state where the card is inserted in the card reading unit 300.

  In the card effect control process (S1313), first, it is determined whether a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (that is, whether a balance greater than 0 is stored in the slave card information storage area 223e) (S1701). ). If it is determined that a card with a balance is not inserted (S1701: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a card with a balance has been inserted into the card reading unit 300 (S1701: Yes), whether an opening command indicating the start of jackpot is received from the main controller 110 (that is, jackpot It is determined whether or not the game is started (S1702). If it is determined that the opening command is received (S1702: Yes), it is determined whether the return lock flag 223f is set to ON (S1703). If it is determined that the return lock flag 223f is on (S1703: Yes), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the return lock flag 223f is off (S1703: No), a card discharge signal for setting the card return to the card reading unit 300 is set. As shown in FIG. 13, this card ejection signal is a signal that activates the signal directly to the card reading unit 300 side rather than the return extraction means 42a, and is the same as when the return button 42 is operated. Let it be in a state.

  The slave card information storage area 223e is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S1705). A card discharge notification sound command for outputting a sound “Card is returned. Please accept” is set in the sound output device 226. A display card discharge notification command for displaying the characters “card is returned. Please remember to receive it!” Is set on the third symbol display device 81 (S1707).

  Thus, when the jackpot game is started, the card is forcibly returned in the state where the return button 42 is activated, so that the player does not have to operate the return button 42. Cards can be collected. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time and effort of the player. In addition, because the opportunity to be returned forcibly was the start of the jackpot game, the need for ball lending continued for a while, so the player forgot to return the card and returned home Can be prevented. Also, since the card will be forcibly returned at the timing when the need for ball lending will disappear for a while, it will be necessary to lend the ball immediately after the card has been forcibly returned, and you will have to insert the card again. It can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1702: No), it is determined whether the return button 42 has been operated (pressed) (S1708). If it is determined that the return button 42 has been operated (S1708: Yes), the subordinate return button flag 223i is set to ON (S1709). On the other hand, when it is determined that the return button 42 is not operated (S1708: No), the sub return button flag 223i is set to OFF (S1710).

  Next, the card notification process (S1314) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the card notification process (S1314). This card notification process (S1314) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and based on the card information inserted in the card reading unit 300, The process which alert | reports card information to the 3 symbol display apparatus 81 is performed. In addition, when it is detected that a game is not being executed, if a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300, the card with a balance remains inserted in the card reading unit 300. The notification process is executed.

  In the card notification process (S1314), it is first determined whether the card balance stored in the slave card information storage area 223e is greater than 0 (that is, there is a card balance) (S1801). If it is determined that there is no card balance (including a case where no card is inserted) (S1801: No), insertion notification lamp turn-off data for turning off the insertion notification lamp 40a is set (S1802).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a card balance (S1801: Yes), the insertion notification lamp 40a for notifying that the card provided on the front frame 14 is inserted in the card reading unit 300 is inserted. Notification lamp lighting data is set (S1803). It is determined whether the card balance stored in the slave card information storage area 223e is 3000 yen or more (S1804). If it is determined that the card balance is equal to or greater than 3000 yen (S1804: Yes), a voice notification command for causing the voice output device 226 to output a voice “Card is in” is set (S1805). A high-priced notification command for display is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in red characters to alternately display the characters "Card is in !!!!" and "Card balance is XX yen." (S1806). Note that the amount of XX is displayed according to the card balance.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the card balance is less than 3000 yen (S1804: No), white letters “Card is in!” And “Card balance is XX yen” are displayed. A display small amount notification command to be alternately displayed at a cycle of 30 seconds is set (S1807). Note that the amount of XX is displayed according to the card balance.

  By configuring in this way, while the card balance is high, the player can always be aware of the fact that the card is inserted with voice and conspicuous characters, so a high balance It is possible to prevent a player from forgetting a certain card and causing damage such as theft. In addition, when the card balance is small, it is displayed in a relatively inconspicuous character color and is not notified by voice, so that the player is always notified by voice and conspicuous characters. You can prevent problems that can not be concentrated in the game.

  In this embodiment, the card balance is determined to be high when it is 3000 yen or more. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the amount may be set as appropriate. Moreover, it may be configured to be provided on the money amount setting button and the front frame 14 so that a threshold amount for changing the notification can be set by a player's operation. Moreover, you may comprise so that alerting | reporting may be prohibited by selection of a player. By configuring in this way, the player can change the setting, and the game can be performed in a state according to the player's preference.

  Although the color of the notification character is white, it is not limited to this, and it may be a translucent character color. A character appearing in a reach or the like may be displayed on the card reading unit 300 in the card reading unit 300 according to clothes color or production. You may comprise so that it may alert | report that a certain card | curd is inserted.

  It is determined whether the handle sensor 510 is off (S1808). If it is determined that the handle sensor is off (S1808: Yes), the handle counter 223g is incremented by 1 and updated (S1809). It is determined whether the updated value of the handle counter 223g is equal to or greater than a set value (15 seconds in the present embodiment) (S1810). Here, the handle counter 223g is updated when the handle sensor 510 is turned off every predetermined cycle, so that the value of the handle counter 223g can be converted into time from the execution cycle and determined. .

  If it is determined that the value of the handle counter 223g is less than the set value (S1810: No), the process of S1813 is executed. If it is determined that the value of the handle counter 223g is equal to or greater than the set value (S1810: Yes), a card notification sound for outputting a sound of “Peep” from the sound output device 226 and “Forgot to return the card!” A display notification command is set (S1811). On the other hand, if it is determined that the handle sensor 510 is on (S1808), the value of the handle counter 223g is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S1812). Thereafter, the process of S1813 is executed.

  As described above, when the handle sensor 510 remains off for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 15 seconds) or longer, if a card with a card balance remains inserted in the card reading unit 300, the player Since a character for notifying the player to return the card and a notification sound for alerting the player are output, even if the player forgets to return the card, the player can be made aware. In addition, even when the user has already left the seat, the user can be reminded that he / she has forgotten to return the card by listening to the notification sound and can return to the seat again. In addition, when a player returns home without noticing the notification sound, the store clerk can recognize that the card has been forgotten by the notification sound and manage it as a forgotten item at the game store. can do.

  In the process of S1813, it is determined whether the human sensor 400 provided on the front frame 14 is on (that is, there is no player in front of the pachinko machine 10) (S1813). When it is determined that the human sensor 400 is turned on (S1814: Yes), a card notification sound for outputting a voice “Peep” from the sound output device 226 and a display notification “Forgot to return the card!” A command is set (S1814). On the other hand, when it is determined that the human sensor 400 is off (that is, the player is in front of the pachinko machine 10) (S1813: No), the process of S1815 is executed.

  Thus, the presence sensor 400 is determined by the human sensor 400, it is determined that there is no player, and if a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300, the card is inserted. Since the notification prompting the user to return is made, it is possible to notice that the player has forgotten to return as soon as the player forgets to return and stands. Therefore, it can be prevented that the player forgets to return the card and thus suffers damage such as theft of the card.

  In the present embodiment, the notification regarding the card return is immediately performed when the human sensor 400 is turned on. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the human sensor 400 is turned on. Etc.) may be configured to be notified when triggered. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent notification when the human sensor 400 is turned on only for a short time, for example, when the player tilts his / her body a little. Therefore, it is possible to prevent frequent notifications and make the player feel uncomfortable.

  It is determined whether the upper plate sensor 17a and the ball removal button sensor 52a are on (S1815). When it is determined that the upper plate sensor 17a and the ball removal button sensor 52a are turned on (S1815: Yes), the card notification sound for outputting the voice “Peep” from the audio output device 226 and “forgetting to return the card” The display notification command “!” Is set (S1816). On the other hand, if it is determined that the upper plate sensor 17a or the ball removal button sensor 52a is off (S1815: No), this process is terminated.

  The fact that the upper plate sensor 17a is on indicates that there is no game ball on the upper plate 17, and that the ball removal button sensor is on indicates that the ball is being discharged into the dollar box. Therefore, it can be said that the player is about to return after finishing the game. In this case, if a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300, a notification is made to prompt the user to return the card. Thus, the player can notice that the card remains inserted before returning home. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player forgets to return the card and returns home, resulting in damage such as theft.

  Next, the card return effect process (S1315) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the card return effect process (S1315). This card return effect process (S1315) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the return display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, when the return button 42 is operated, a process for displaying a fixed notification effect on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In the card return effect process (S1315), first, it is determined whether a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (that is, whether the balance information stored in the slave card information storage area 223e is greater than 0). (S1901). If it is determined that a card with a balance is not inserted (S1901: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a card with a balance is inserted (S1901: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol is being variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1902). If it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S1902: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol variation display is being performed (S1902: Yes), whether the card return effect flag 223k is on (that is, the return variation display mode is variable display on the third symbol display device 81). Is determined) (S1903). If it is determined that the card return effect flag 223k is off (S1903: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the card return effect flag 223k is on (S1903: Yes), it is determined whether the sub return button flag 223i is set to on (S1904).

  When it is determined that the sub return button flag 223i is off (S1904: No), a special symbol display mode for notifying the third symbol display device 81 of a big hit (see the lower diagram in FIG. 4B) Set the display confirmation notification command to be displayed.

  In this way, when the return variation display mode is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player operates the return button 42 according to the notification content displayed in the return variation display mode, A jackpot is announced. Therefore, the player can always play the game while thinking that the variation of the special symbol is started in the return variation display mode, and can be aware that the return button 42 is operated. In addition, since the jackpot is notified by operating the return button 42 based on the display of the return variation display mode, even after returning the card, until a ball lending is necessary for a while. Since there is time, the player can manage the card by closing it. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk of forgetting to return the card and causing damage such as theft. Moreover, the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be switched by operating the return button 42, and the function of the return button 42 can be increased besides returning a card.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the password input process (S1316) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the password input process (S1316). This password input process (S1316) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and a password for setting the return button 42 to be enabled or disabled is set. Executes processing related to input and setting.

  In the password input process (S1316), first, it is determined whether the password input screen (see FIG. 5B) or the password setting screen (FIG. 5A) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2000). ). When it is determined that the password input screen or the password setting screen is displayed (S2000: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated. If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S2001: Yes), it is determined whether any button other than the enter button 22a has been operated (S2003).

  If it is determined that a button other than the enter button 22a has been operated (S2003), it is determined whether the up button 22b has been operated (S2004). When it is determined that the up button 22b has been operated (S2004: Yes), the number specified background of the digit specified by the cursor displayed on the password input screen or the password setting screen is displayed one up. An upward command is set (S2005).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a button other than the up button 22b has been operated (S2004: No), it is determined whether the down button 22d has been operated (S2006). When it is determined that the down button 22d has been operated (S2006: Yes), the number specified background of the digit specified by the cursor displayed on the password input screen or the password setting screen is lowered by one. A downward command is set (S2007). On the other hand, if it is determined that a button other than the down button 22d has been operated (S2006: No), it is determined whether the right button 22e has been operated (S2008).

  When it is determined that the right button 22e has been operated (S2008: Yes), the cursor displayed on the password input screen or the password setting screen is moved to the next digit to the right of the digit where the cursor is displayed. The right command for display to be set is set (S2009). On the other hand, if it is determined that a button other than the right button 22e has been operated (S2008: No), it is determined that the left button 22c has been operated, and the cursor is displayed on the password input screen or the password setting screen. A display left direction command is set to move to the next left digit of the displayed digit (S2010).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the enter button 22a has been operated (S2003: No), password processing is executed (S2002). The password processing (S2002) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 35. On the password setting screen or the password input screen, a password is set for the set or input password, and the return button 42 is pressed. If the password is invalidated or the input password is compared with the set password, and if they match, processing for enabling the return button 42 is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, password processing (S2002) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this password processing (S2002). This password process (S2002) is executed in the password input process (FIG. 26, S1316) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and the password for setting the return button 42 to be enabled or disabled. Execute processing related to input and setting.

  In the password processing (S2002), first, it is determined whether or not the displayed screen is a password setting screen for newly setting a password (that is, whether or not a password is set in the password storage area 223h). S2021). If it is determined that the displayed password setting screen is displayed (S2021: Yes), it is determined whether the input password is a normal password (S2022). Here, a normal password is considered to be a case where a number that is not actually mixed due to noise or the like (in this embodiment, a number other than 1 to 5) or a password whose number of digits is insufficient. It is done.

  If it is determined that the password is normal (S2022: Yes), the input password is stored (set) in the password storage area 223h (S2023). A return button invalid signal is generated (S2024). The return lock flag 223f is set to ON (S2025). Here, the return button invalid signal is a signal that inactivates the photo MOS relay of the changeover switch 42b (a state in which the diode is extinguished) in the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the signal line connecting the return button 42 and the card reading unit 300 is configured to be cut and switched to the connected state, so that the return button 42 is set to be enabled or disabled. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and the return button 42 may be mechanically fixed so that the return button 42 cannot be operated (pressed) from the back side by a solenoid or the like. With this configuration, the return button 42 can be invalidated more easily.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the input password is abnormal (S2022: No), a display error command for displaying the characters "Please enter the password again" on the third symbol display device 81 is set. (S2026).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the password input screen is displayed (that is, the password is stored in the password storage area 223h) (S2021: No), the password input this time is the password. It is determined whether or not the passwords stored in the storage area 223h match (S2027). If it is determined that the passwords match as a result of the verification (S2027: Yes), a return button valid signal is set (set). Here, the return button valid signal is set so that the photo MOS relay as the changeover switch 42b is set to active, the diode of the photo MOS relay is turned on, and the signal line between the return button 42 and the card reading unit 300 is connected. It is a signal set to the state. The password storage area 223h is reset to 0, which is an initial value (S2029). The return lock flag 223f is set to OFF (S2030). On the other hand, if it is determined that the entered password and the password stored in the password storage area 223h do not match (S2027: No), the characters “password does not match” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display mismatch error command to be displayed is set.

  Thus, the return button 42 is invalidated by setting the password, and the return button 42 is validated by inputting the same password as the set password in the state where the password is set. (Cancellation is invalidated) If the return button 42 is invalidated, even if you forget to operate the return button 42 and leave your seat, the card will be returned to others. Can be prevented from being stolen. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with a card with a balance inserted in peace.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the break process (S1317) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this break process (S1317). This break process (S1317) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the player operates the break button 500 arranged on the front frame 14. Thus, processing for setting invalidation of the return button 42 is executed.

  In the break process (S1317), first, it is determined whether a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S2101). If it is determined that a card with a balance is inserted in the card reading unit 300 (S2101: Yes), it is determined whether the break button 500 has been operated (pressed) (S2102). If it is determined that the break button 42 has been operated (S2102: Yes), it is determined whether a password is stored in the password storage area 223h (S2103). When it is determined that a password is stored in the password storage area 223h (S2103: Yes), a display password input command for displaying a password input screen on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the password is not stored in the password storage area 223h (S2103: No), a display password setting command for displaying the password setting screen on the third symbol display device 81 is set ( S2105). On the other hand, when it is determined that a card with a balance is not inserted (S2101: No), or when the break button 500 is not operated (S2102: No), this process ends.

  As described above, when the password is set and the return button 42 is not invalidated by operating the break button 500, the process of displaying the password setting screen is executed in the process of waiting for the customer effect (S1305). It is possible to display the password screen, set the password, and invalidate the return button 42 without waiting until the password is displayed.

  Further, when the password is set by operating the break button 500, the password input screen is displayed. Therefore, when the return button 42 is rushed and activated, the break button 500 is displayed. The password input screen can be displayed immediately and the return button 42 can be activated by operating. Therefore, the player can perform without waiting for the input of the password, and the time can be used effectively.

  In this embodiment, the password setting screen is displayed by operating the break button 500. However, by operating the break button 500, the return button 42 is forcibly invalidated, and a pachinko machine is displayed. You may comprise so that the release switch etc. which validate the setting which invalidated the return button 42 with the break button 500 may be provided in the back side of the apparatus 10. FIG. In this way, if the break button 500 is operated, the player can take a break immediately and the convenience is enhanced. In addition, when the user wants to release the return button 42 after finishing the break, the setting can be canceled by calling a store clerk of the amusement store, and the security can be improved.

  In addition, by pressing the break button 500, the ball lending button 43 may be invalidated, or it may be set so as to prohibit the launch of the game ball. You may comprise so that it may display on the apparatus 81. FIG. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress damage that is illegally played by other players during the break or that the game ball is stolen by operating the ball lending button 43.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the case has been described in which the return button 42 is set with a password to perform invalidation and validation switching.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the shutter member 710 capable of covering the front side of the return button 42 and the ball lending button 43 is disposed, and the shutter member is set by setting a password. 710 is locked and unlocked.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the following points. The second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that a shutter member 710 is arranged and the locking and unlocking is performed by a password.

  Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 37 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, a shutter button 700 and a shutter member 710 are added to the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Although details will be described later, the shutter button 700 is an operation button for displaying an input or setting screen for inputting or setting a password for locking or unlocking the slide of the shutter member 710.

  The shutter member 710 is made of a thin metal plate, slides to the left and right, and closes to cover the front side of the return button 42 and the ball lending button 43 and opens to be housed inside the front frame 14. It is configured to be movable. FIG. 38 is a view showing the shutter member 710 and the movable portion of the shutter member 710. FIG. 38A is a diagram showing a state where the shutter member 710 is moved to the closed position, and FIG. 38B is a diagram showing a state where the shutter member 710 is moved to the open position. As shown in FIG. 38A, an operation knob 710a is formed on the front side (the front side of the gaming machine) of the shutter member 710 so as to project the front side so that the player can slide the shutter member 710. ing. Although not shown, the front frame 14 is formed with a rail portion that slidably holds the shutter member 710, and is held by inserting the shutter member 710 into the rail portion. It is configured as follows.

  As a configuration for fixing (locking) the shutter member 710 in the closed position, a lock motor 900 and an L-shaped locking regulating member 900 a that rotates in accordance with the rotation of the lock motor 900 are provided. The lock motor 900 is rotated 90 degrees in the forward and reverse directions, so that the L-shaped piece of the locking regulating member 900a contacts one side of the open position side of the shutter member 710 and moves from the closed position to the open position. It is moved to a position where it is restricted and a position where it is retracted downward so that the locking restriction member 900a does not come into contact with the shutter member 710 even if the shutter member 710 slides.

  A lock sensor 910 for detecting the position of the lock regulating member 900a is provided. The lock sensor 910 is configured by a reflective optical sensor, and is configured to detect the lock regulating member 900a by reflected light. As shown in FIG. 38A, the lock sensor 910 is disposed at a position where the lock regulating member 900a is not detected when the lock regulating member 900a regulates the sliding of the shutter member 710. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38 (b), the locking regulating member 900a is disposed at a position where the locking regulating member 710 is detected at a position where the locking regulating member 900a is retracted to a position where the sliding of the shutter member 710 is not regulated. That is, when the lock sensor 910 does not detect the lock regulating member 900a (the lock sensor 910 is off), it is detected that the shutter member 710 is fixed, and the lock sensor 910 detects the lock regulating member 710. Is detected (the lock sensor 910 is on), the shutter member 710 is detected to be in a released state (slidable state).

  In the present embodiment, the shutter member 710 is configured to be fixed or released with the configuration shown in FIG. 38. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration is such that the regulating piece is projected and fixed by a solenoid or the like. Alternatively, the sliding operation of the shutter member 710 may be restricted by a powerful electromagnet or the like.

  With reference to FIG. 39, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 39 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. The block diagram of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is different from the block diagram of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the shutter button 700 and the lock motor 900 are connected to the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. A lock sensor 910 has been added.

  The shutter button 700 is composed of a push-down switch, and is disposed on the right side of the ball lending button 43 on the front frame 14 so as to protrude to the front side. When the shutter button 700 is pressed, an electrical signal is output to the input / output port 113 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  The lock motor 900 is configured by a stepping motor for rotating the lock regulating member 900 a and is controlled to rotate based on a signal from the sound lamp control device 113. The lock sensor 910 is configured by a reflective optical sensor for detecting the lock regulating member 900a.

  A shutter password storage area 223p is added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. The shutter password storage area 223p stores an input password (see FIG. 43, S1373) in shutter processing (FIG. 43, S1370) executed by the MPU 113 of the sound lamp control device 113, which will be described later. When the shutter member 710 is fixed (when a password is stored in the shutter password storage area 223p), whether the input password matches the password stored in the shutter password storage area 223p. When collation is executed, data in the shutter password storage area 223p is used.

  With reference to FIG. 40, the main process (S1300) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the main process (S1300). The main processing (FIG. 40, S1300) of the second embodiment is different from the main processing (FIG. 26, S1300) of the first embodiment in shutter input processing (FIG. 41, S1340) and shutter setting processing (FIG. 42, S1350). ) And have been added. Details of the shutter input process (FIG. 41, S1340) and the shutter setting process (FIG. 42, S1350) will be described later. The processes in S1301 to S1322 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes in S1301 to S1322 in the first embodiment. When the processing of S1316 is completed, shutter input processing (FIG. 40, S1300) is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 41, the shutter input process (S1340) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 40, S1300) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this shutter input processing (S1340). The shutter input process (S1340 in FIG. 41) is a process for executing a process for displaying an input screen for inputting or setting a password for locking or unlocking the slide of the shutter member 710.

  In the shutter input process (FIG. 41, S1340), first, it is determined whether the shutter 700 has been operated (pressed) (S1341). If it is determined that the shutter button 700 has been operated (S1341: Yes), it is determined whether a password is stored in the shutter password storage area 223p (S1342). If it is determined that the password is stored in the shutter password storage area 223p (S1342: Yes), a display shutter input command is generated (set). This display shutter input command is a command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the same display as in FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that no password is stored in the shutter password storage area 223p (S1342: No), a display shutter setting command is generated (set) (S1344). This display shutter setting command is a command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the same display as in FIG. If it is determined that the shutter button 700 has not been operated (S1341: No), this process ends.

  In this way, when the player operates the shutter button 700, either the password input screen or the password setting screen is automatically set according to the state of the shutter member 710 at that time. Therefore, the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the shutter setting process (S1350) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 40, S1300) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. . FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the shutter setting process (S1350). In the shutter setting process (FIG. 42, S1350), the password input screen or the cursor on the setting screen is moved based on the operation of the frame button 22, and the shutter member 710 is set based on the password being set or input. This is a process for executing the lock or unlock.

  In the shutter setting process (FIG. 42, S1350), first, is the shutter password input screen (see FIG. 5B) or the shutter password setting screen (FIG. 5A) displayed on the third symbol display device 81? It is determined (S1351). If it is determined that the shutter password input screen or shutter password setting screen is displayed (S1352: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been operated (S1352). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S1352: Yes), it is determined whether any button other than the enter button 22a has been operated (S1353).

  If it is determined that a button other than the enter button 22a has been operated (S1353: Yes), it is determined whether the up button 22b has been operated (S1354). If it is determined that the up button 22b has been operated (S1354: Yes), the number designation background of the digit designated by the cursor displayed on the shutter password input screen or the shutter password setting screen is displayed one up. The display up direction command to be raised is set (S1355).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a button other than the up button 22b has been operated (S1354: No), it is determined whether the down button 22d has been operated (S1356). When it is determined that the down button 22d has been operated (S1356: Yes), the digit designation background of the digit designated by the cursor displayed on the shutter password input screen or the shutter password setting screen is lowered by one. A display downward command is set (S1357). On the other hand, if it is determined that a button other than the down button 22d has been operated (S1356: No), it is determined whether the right button 22e has been operated (S1358).

  If it is determined that the right button 22e has been operated (S1358: Yes), the cursor displayed on the password input screen or the password setting screen is moved to the next digit to the right of the digit where the cursor is displayed. The display right direction command to be set is set (S1359). On the other hand, if it is determined that a button other than the right button 22e has been operated (S1358: No), it is determined that the left button 22c has been operated, and the cursor displayed on the shutter password input screen or the shutter password setting screen is displayed. A display left direction command for moving the cursor to the next digit to the left of the displayed digit is set (S1360).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the enter button 22a has been operated (S1353: No), shutter processing is executed (S1370). The shutter process (S1370) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 43, but a password is set for the password set or input on the shutter password setting screen or the shutter password input screen, and the shutter member is set. A process of unlocking the shutter member 710 is executed if the 710 is locked (fixed) in the closed position, or the input password is compared with the set password, and if they match, the shutter member 710 is unlocked.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the shutter process (S1370) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this shutter processing (S1370). This shutter process (S1370) is executed in the shutter setting process (FIG. 42, S1350) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and executes a process for locking or unlocking the shutter member 710. To do.

  In the shutter processing (S1370), first, it is determined whether or not the displayed screen is a shutter password setting screen for setting a new password (that is, whether or not a password is set in the shutter password storage area 223p). (S1371). When it is determined that the shutter password setting screen is displayed (S1371: Yes), it is determined whether the input password is a normal password (S1372). Here, a normal password is considered to be a case where a number that is not actually mixed due to noise or the like (in this embodiment, a number other than 1 to 5) or a password whose number of digits is insufficient. It is done.

  If it is determined that the password is normal (S1372: Yes), the input password is stored (set) in the shutter password storage area 223p (S1373). A signal for operating the lock motor 900 to the closed position (in this embodiment, a position rotated 90 degrees to the right from the open position) is set (S1374).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the input password is abnormal (S1372: No), a display error command for displaying the characters "Please enter the password again" on the third symbol display device 81 is set. (S1375).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the shutter password input screen is displayed (that is, the password is stored in the shutter password storage area 223p) (S1371: No), the password input this time Whether the password stored in the shutter password storage area 223p matches is determined (S1376). If it is determined that the passwords match as a result of the verification (S1376: Yes), a signal for moving the lock restricting member 900a to the release position where the lock motor 900 unlocks the shutter member 710 is set (this book) In the embodiment, the position rotated 90 degrees rightward from the lock position) (S1377). The shutter password storage area 223p is reset to an initial value (0 in this embodiment) (S1378).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the entered password and the password stored in the shutter password storage area 223p do not match (S1376: No), the characters “password does not match” appear on the third symbol display device 81. The display mismatch error command for displaying is set (S1379).

  Thus, the password is set so that the shutter member 710 can be locked in the closed position. Accordingly, the player can lock the shutter member 710 by sliding the shutter member 710 to the closed position and then setting the password on the shutter password setting screen to prohibit the sliding of the shutter member 710. On the other hand, when the shutter button 700 is operated with the shutter member 710 locked, the shutter password input screen is displayed and the same password set on the shutter password setting screen is input. The lock of the shutter member 710 can be released. Therefore, the shutter member 710 can be locked or unlocked with an easy operation. Also, since the password is reset once unlocked, the password set by the previous player does not remain even if the player changes, and the password can be used without being confused. Can be locked or unlocked.

  In the present embodiment, once the shutter member 710 is locked with a password, the lock is maintained until the set password is input or the initialization process of the RAM 223 is executed. Not limited to this, the configuration may be such that the lock is automatically released when a predetermined time elapses, and when the predetermined time elapses, the locked state is indicated by the third symbol display device 81 or the audio output device 226. You may comprise so that it may alert | report. With such a configuration, even when the shutter member 710 is left in a locked state, it is automatically canceled or notified when a predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) elapses. Thus, the normal state can be restored by initial processing of the RAM 223 or the like by the store clerk of the game store.

  In the present embodiment, the shutter member 710 is configured to be slid by the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the shutter member 710 is automatically moved to the closed position when a password is set or the shutter button is pressed. You may comprise. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a problem of forgetting to slide the shutter member 710 to the closed position and setting a password. Further, by operating the shutter button 700, the shutter member 710 may be automatically locked without requiring a password or the like. In such a case, the lock may be released by calling a store clerk or performing lock release by fingerprint authentication or the like.

  In the present embodiment, both the return button 42 and the ball lending button 43 are covered with the shutter member 710. However, only the return button 42 or only the ball lending button 43 may be covered. Good. Alternatively, the return button 42 and the ball lending button 43 may be provided with dedicated shutters so that they can be locked individually.

  In the present embodiment, a password is used to lock the shutter member 710. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Fingerprint authentication or voice recognition may be used, and the pachinko machine 10 side forcibly issues a password or a two-dimensional code. Then, the player may be configured to take and manage it with a memo or a mobile phone or the like, or the pachinko machine 10 may issue a dedicated IC card or the like. With this configuration, there is no problem that the player forgets the password, and the return button 42 and the ball lending button 43 can be easily locked.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the card reading unit 300 extracts the signals for turning on the respective segments of the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c of the balance indicator 41, whereby the balance information of the card inserted into the card reading unit 300 is extracted. It was configured to discriminate. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the respective light amounts of the first LED 41a, the second LED 41b, and the third LED 41c of the balance indicator 41 are detected, and the balance displayed on the balance indicator 41 based on the detected light amount. It is different in that it is configured to detect information. Other configurations are the same.

  As a configuration for detecting the light amount of each LED of the balance indicator 41, a light detection sensor capable of detecting a minimum light amount is arranged on each balance LED on the balance display surface of the balance indicator 41. In addition, a light detection sensor capable of detecting the amount of light on the wall portion by providing a wall portion standing partially or all around the balance display surface on which the balance of the balance display 41 is displayed is not limited thereto. You may arrange | position toward each LED. Further, the substrate on which each LED is arranged may be configured by a transmissive substrate, and a light detection sensor for detecting the light amount of each LED may be provided on the back side of the substrate.

  In addition, the light detection sensor is configured to be provided for each LED, but is not limited thereto, and may be configured to be provided for each segment of the LED. By configuring in this way, it is possible to detect the balance display that is lit and displayed on the balance display 41 more accurately. Moreover, you may arrange | position a light detection sensor so that the total light quantity which the 1st LED41a, 2nd LED41b, and 3rd LED41c light may be detected. With this configuration, the number of light detection sensors can be reduced, and the number of wirings and the like can be reduced.

  The main control device 110 receives the light amount detected by the light detection sensor as a light amount signal via the payout control device 111. Based on the received light quantity signal, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 determines display information data corresponding to the light quantity indicated by the light quantity signal. This determination method is performed by setting a display information correspondence table in which display information is stored in association with each light quantity combination detected by each light detection sensor in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. The display information corresponding to the light quantity is selected from the display information correspondence table to determine the card balance.

  With this configuration, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can identify the display information displayed on the balance display device 41 without electrically connecting the balance display device 41 and the main control device 110. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized signal from being transmitted from the card reading unit 300 to the main controller 110. It is also possible to prevent an illegal signal from being sent from the pachinko machine 10 side to the card reading unit 300.

  In the present embodiment, the light detection sensor that detects the amount of light is used. However, the balance information is acquired using an imaging unit that recognizes the balance display displayed on the balance display 41. You may comprise. In such a case, in order to prevent the player from visually recognizing the display on the balance indicator 41, the display is inclined obliquely to a position that does not overlap each LED on the facing side of the board on which each LED is arranged. A mirror may be provided so that the balance display reflected on the mirror is imaged (captured) from each LED substrate side. Further, each LED of the balance indicator 41 may be arranged on a transparent substrate so that the balance display is imaged (captured) from the back side of each LED substrate.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the card balance inserted in the card reading unit 300 is determined and the balance is notified by the pachinko machine 10 has been described. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, there is provided an investment amount storage area for storing the decrease amount of the card balance stored in the card information storage area 223e according to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 as the total investment amount, The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that control for giving game history information and the like to the player is performed based on the value of the investment amount storage area. Since other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  First, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. When the determination button 22a of the frame button 22 of the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 is operated on the standby screen, a menu screen is displayed, and a screen for inputting a password for managing game history information can be selected. This password is issued based on the player's information stored in the server by storing the player's information in the server when the player registers as a member on a specific homepage using a mobile phone or the like. Password.

  Information stored in the server includes the number of jackpots, a specific reach, a specific gaming state (such as the number of times the probability variation has continued and the number of times the premier character has been displayed on the third symbol display device 81), the total investment amount, The total number of game balls that have been issued, the amount of investment and the balance based on the game balls that have been paid out, and the total number of points awarded in the game are stored.

  Depending on the information stored in the server, the benefits obtained on the homepage accessed by the player may change, or the password may be entered into the gaming machine to change the mode (voice, music, type of character displayed, etc.) ) Will change. Specifically, when the predetermined number of jackpots is reached, the wallpaper displayed on the mobile phone standby screen, the ringtone of the mobile phone, etc. that could not be obtained before can be downloaded, Characters, images, music, and the like displayed on the symbol display device 81 are performed in a different manner from usual.

  When the password issued on the member-only screen of the homepage is input to the pachinko machine 10, various information stored in the server can be discriminated by the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, a corresponding password is set in advance for information stored in the server, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 reads the corresponding data from the ROM 223 when the password is input. To be set. When a game is played, various information in the game (such as the number of jackpots, a specific reach, and a specific game state (such as the number of times the probability variation has continued and the number of times the premier character has been displayed on the third symbol display device 81) is read with a password The data is added or updated and stored.

  When the player finishes the game, he / she operates the enter button 22a of the frame button 22 to display the menu screen and select to issue a two-dimensional code, thereby updating various information ( A process for generating a two-dimensional code is executed based on the number of jackpots, a specific reach, or a specific gaming state (such as the number of consecutive times of probability variation or the number of times a premier character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81). The generated two-dimensional code is displayed on the symbol display device 81. The player takes in the two-dimensional code by using the camera function of the mobile phone and accesses the member-dedicated page on the home page indicated by the two-dimensional code. Thus, various information newly updated in the game played this time is stored in the server.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 can identify the total investment amount of the player and the balance of payment so far, so that the variation pattern of the selected special symbol is changed based on the investment amount and the balance of payment. Is done. Specifically, for a player with a large investment amount, when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol that is a big hit, a premium with a low probability of being selected during normal times (when the investment amount is small) The reach selection probability is set high. This makes it easy for premium players to select premium reach for players with a large investment amount, that is, players with a long game time, and see all types of variation patterns of special symbols set in the pachinko machine 10. It is easy to be configured.

  In addition, in the case of a big hit, the balance information can be confirmed by displaying the balance information on the third symbol display device 81. If the probability variation state continues several times in succession, the balance becomes positive. Can be confirmed. Therefore, a player can play a game with a goal, and when the goal is achieved, the joy can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  Further, in order to detect the launch of the game ball, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 measures the time during which the handle sensor 510 is on. In this embodiment, since 100 game balls are fired per minute, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 calculates the number of shots based on the measured time. In addition, in order not to include in the measurement time the case where the handle sensor 510 is turned on even though the game ball has not been fired, the handle sensor 510 is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 10 Second), when the game ball does not pass through the second entrance 67, the number of shots can be calculated more accurately by stopping the measurement. In this case, when a game ball passes through the second entrance 67, measurement may be resumed.

  In this way, by detecting the launch of a game ball, investing whether the game is played with a game ball by lending a ball or whether the game is played with a possession ball obtained by jackpot without lending a ball It can be determined by the time change of the forehead. When it is determined that a game is played with a ball, a notification mode indicating that the return button 42 is operated is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so as to perform a card return operation. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to operate the card return 42 and returning home with the card inserted in the card reading unit 300. Therefore, damage caused by card theft or misuse of card information (such as a ball lending operation without permission) can be suppressed.

  In addition, when playing with this ball, the state of the game so far (after the big hit, the state of the difference between the game ball that has been paid out and the game ball that has been released so far, etc.) ) To determine whether it is possible to play a game with a holding ball, so that it is not possible to play a game with a holding ball (that is, after a big hit, or when the number of difference balls fired is larger) ), The game store side can check the state of the pachinko machine 10 by outputting an error command to the hall computer or the like via an external terminal (not shown). Therefore, even when a game ball is illegally brought in from outside the store and played, the fraud can be detected early. Therefore, damage to the amusement store can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the time during which the game ball is being fired is determined by measuring the time during which the handle sensor 510 is on. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball is fired from the ball launch unit 112a on the game board 13. It may be configured to provide a sensor for detecting a game ball, or may be configured to detect and count the number of game balls supplied to the ball launch unit 112a.

  In addition, you may combine the structure from 1st Embodiment to 4th Embodiment suitably.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the slot machine and the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown.

  External signal receiving means that is provided outside the gaming machine and receives an external signal that is output when an external device that requests the gaming machine to lend gaming media reads valuable value information stored in the storage medium A signal for extracting an external signal output from the external device to the external signal receiving means in a gaming machine having external control means controlled based on the external signal received by the external signal receiving means Extraction means, storage medium determination means for determining whether the external device has read the storage medium based on the external signal extracted by the signal extraction means, and control means for executing main control of the game are the storage medium And a notification means for notifying the player of information related to the storage medium to the player based on a notification signal output based on the determination result of the determination means. Game machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, an external signal that is provided outside the gaming machine and that is output based on the reading of the valuable information stored in the storage medium by an external device that requests the gaming machine to lend gaming media. Is received by the external signal receiving means. The external control means is controlled based on the external signal received by the external signal receiving means. An external signal output from the external device to the external signal receiving means is extracted by the signal extracting means. Based on the external signal extracted by the signal extraction unit, the storage medium determination unit determines whether the external device has read the storage medium. Based on the notification signal output from the determination result of the storage medium determination means by the control means for executing the main control of the game, the information about the storage medium is notified to the player by the notification means. Thus, the player can determine whether there is a storage medium read by the external device based on the information about the storage medium. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player forgets that the external device has read the storage medium. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the damage that the player goes home while reading the storage medium and is stolen for the valuable information stored in the storage medium or the storage medium.

  In the gaming machine of the gaming machine A1, the display mode based on the valuable value information of the storage medium read by the external device has a valuable display means whose display is controlled by the external device, and the signal extraction means has its valuable display An external display control signal output from the external device for display control of the means; and the storage medium discriminating means based on the external display control signal extracted by the signal extraction means. The information means determines the value information of the storage medium being read, and the informing means informs the player information based on the value information of the storage medium based on the determination result of the storage medium determination means. A gaming machine A2 characterized in that it informs a player.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are produced. That is, the display mode based on the valuable value information of the storage medium read by the external device is controlled by the external device by the valuable display means. An external display control signal output from the external device for display control of the valuable display means is extracted by the signal extraction means. Based on the external display control signal extracted by the signal extraction means, the valuable information of the storage medium read by the external device is determined by the storage medium determination means. Based on the determination result, information based on the valuable value information of the storage medium is notified to the player by the notification means. As a result, it is possible to determine the valuable information displayed on the valuable display means, and to make a notification based on the valuable information. Therefore, more accurate information can be notified about the storage medium read in the external device. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player forgets that the external device has read the storage medium.

  In the gaming machine A1 or gaming machine A2, the value display means is configured to display predetermined information by combining and displaying a plurality of light emitting segments, and the external display control signal is Each of the plurality of light emitting segments is output, and the signal extraction means extracts the display control signal output corresponding to each of the light emitting segments as an external display control signal. The game machine A3 is characterized in that the storage medium discrimination means discriminates valuable value information of the storage medium by combining the extracted external display control signals.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, predetermined information is displayed on the valuable display means by combining and displaying a plurality of light emitting segments. In addition, a display control signal is output for each of the plurality of light emitting segments. Display control signals corresponding to the respective light-emitting segments are extracted by the signal extraction means as external display control signals. By combining the extracted external display control signals, the valuable information of the storage medium is determined by the storage medium determination means. Thereby, the display content displayed by the valuable display means can be accurately determined. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of more accurate information with respect to the valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from forgetting to read the storage medium into the external device.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the signal extraction means includes a light emitting element that emits light when the external signal is input, and a light receiving element that outputs a signal by receiving light emitted from the light emitting element. And a gaming machine A4 characterized by comprising at least.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are achieved. At least signal extraction means is composed of a light emitting element that emits light when an external signal is input and a light receiving element that outputs a signal by receiving light emitted from the light emitting element. Thereby, since the light emitting element cannot be made to emit light from the gaming machine side, it is possible to suppress fraud in which an unauthorized signal is output from the gaming machine side to the external device. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized operation of outputting a lending signal to an external device. Therefore, damage caused by fraud can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the signal extraction means is at least composed of a magnetic field detection means for detecting a magnetic field that changes when the external signal is output. A feature of the gaming machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are achieved. The signal extraction means is at least composed of magnetic field detection means for detecting a magnetic field that changes when an external signal is output. Thereby, since it is not possible to directly output a signal from the gaming machine side to the external device, it is possible to suppress fraud in which an unauthorized signal is output to the external device.

  An external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable information stored in the storage medium, and receives a lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend gaming media based on the read valuable information. In a gaming machine that pays out game media, an operation means having an operation unit that can be operated by a player, and a storage medium read by the external device are returned to the player based on the operation of the operation means. Operation signal output means for outputting a return signal to the external device for executing a return process to be executed or a release process for releasing the reading of the valuable value information of the storage medium, and the operation unit of the operation means are not operated Even in this case, the operation signal output means has a forced return control means for outputting a return signal based on establishment of a predetermined trigger. Game machine B1 which is characterized.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable information stored in the storage medium, and requests the gaming machine to lend gaming media based on the read valuable information. The game medium is paid out based on the rental request signal. Based on the operation of the operation unit having an operation unit that can be operated by the player, the return processing for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player, or reading of the valuable value information of the storage medium is performed. The canceling process for canceling is executed by outputting a return signal to the external device by the operation signal output means. Even when the operation unit of the operation unit is not operated, a return signal is output from the forced return control unit to the operation signal output unit based on establishment of a predetermined trigger. Thereby, the storage medium read in the external device can be returned to the external device or the read valuable value information can be canceled by the control from the gaming machine side. Therefore, if the player forgets the operation of executing the storage medium return process and the valuable value information release process, the damage to the player due to theft of the storage medium and the abuse of the valuable value information can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B1, based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination means for executing the determination of the success / failure of the game, and the display control means for displaying on the display means the identification information that can identify the determination result of the success / failure determination means. When the identification information indicating that the determination result is a win is displayed on the display means, the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game for giving a privilege to the player, and the forced return control means, A gaming machine B2 characterized in that the return signal is output to the operation signal output means on the basis of the determination result of the success / failure determination means.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is executed by the success / failure determination means. Identification information that can identify the determination result is displayed on the display unit by the display control unit. When the identification information indicating that the determination result is a win is displayed on the display means, a privilege game for giving a privilege to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. A return signal is output from the operation signal output means by the forced return control means on the basis of the success / failure determination result of the success / failure determination means. Thereby, based on execution of a privilege game, the storage medium currently read by the external device can be returned or reading of valuable value information can be cancelled | released. Therefore, the player need not be aware of the storage medium and the valuable value information during the bonus game, and can concentrate on the bonus game. Therefore, by executing the privilege game, it is possible to prevent forgetting that the valuable value information of the storage medium has been read by the external device and forgetting the return process or the release process. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the damage of the player due to theft of the storage medium and misuse of valuable value information.

  In the gaming machine B2, when the success / failure determination condition is satisfied, the satisfied / failure determination condition is stored until the start condition for displaying the identification information of the correctness determination corresponding to the satisfied / failure determination condition is satisfied. A pre-failure determination unit that determines a determination result corresponding to the determination result stored in the determination unit before the start condition is satisfied, and the forced return The control means causes the return signal to be output to the operation signal output means based on the determination that the prior hit determination means is a win. The gaming machine B3,

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or the gaming machine B2, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the determination condition is satisfied, until the start condition for displaying the identification information of the determination result corresponding to the satisfied determination condition is satisfied, the satisfied determination condition is stored by the determination determination storage unit. Is done. The success / failure determination result corresponding to the stored presence / absence determination condition is determined by the prior-correction determination unit before the start condition is satisfied. A return signal is output from the operation signal output means by the forced return control means based on the determination that the pre-winning determination means is a win. Thereby, before the identification information indicating the determination result is displayed on the display unit, the return determination process or the release process is executed in the external device, so that the determination result can be notified to the player in advance. it can. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in the expectation that the return process or the release process will be executed in the external device during the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting that the external device reads the storage medium.

  Valuable display means for controlling display of information based on valuable information of a storage medium read into an external device provided outside the gaming machine by the external device, and a predetermined value corresponding to the valuable information read by the external device In a gaming machine having payout means for paying out a predetermined game medium to a player based on reception of a lending request signal for lending a game medium to a gaming machine, the external display device displays the valuable display means. A signal extracting means for extracting the output display control signal, a valuable determining means for determining valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device based on the signal extracted by the signal extracting means, and the valuable determining means A game machine C1 having a notification means for reporting discrimination information related to valuable value information discriminated by.

  According to the gaming machine C1, information based on the valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device provided outside the gaming machine is displayed on the valuable display means by the external device. Based on the reception of the lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend the predetermined game medium corresponding to the valuable value information read by the external device, the predetermined game medium is paid out to the player by the payout means. A display control signal output from the external device to the valuable display means is extracted by the signal extraction means. Based on the extracted signal, valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device is discriminated by the valuable discriminating means. Discrimination information relating to the discriminated value information is notified by the report notification means. Thereby, the valuable value information of the storage medium can be determined by extracting the signal for displaying the valuable display means. Therefore, the player can be notified of detailed value information by notifying the determination information regarding the determined value information by the notification means. Therefore, the player forgets to execute the storage medium return process or the valuable information release process by recognizing that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. Can be prevented. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from being damaged by the storage medium being stolen or valuable value information being misused.

  In the gaming machine C1, the value display means displays the remaining balance information corresponding to the value information stored in the storage medium as information based on the value information, and pays out the predetermined game medium. Is performed, the remaining balance information corresponding to the updated valuable value information is updated and displayed, and the notification means is displayed on the valuable display means. The game machine C2 is characterized in that the remaining balance information is notified as the discrimination information.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, as information based on the valuable information, the remaining balance information corresponding to the valuable information stored in the storage medium is displayed, and each time a predetermined game medium is paid out, the corresponding valuable value is displayed. The remaining balance information corresponding to the valuable value information that has been consumed and updated is updated and displayed on the valuable value display means. The remaining balance information displayed on the value display means is notified by the notification means as discrimination information. Thus, by notifying the player of the remaining balance of the storage medium, it is possible to recognize that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously determining that there is no remaining balance even though the storage medium has a remaining balance and stopping the game without executing the return process or the release process. is there.

  In the gaming machine C2, the notification means includes a display means capable of displaying a display mode based on the remaining balance information, and the value determining means determines that the remaining balance information is equal to or less than a predetermined set value. If the remaining balance information is determined to be larger than a predetermined set value, the display mode based on the remaining balance information is displayed on the display means in the normal display mode. A gaming machine C3, wherein a display mode based on the remaining balance information is displayed on the display means in a special display mode different from the display mode.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine C2, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the notification means, a display mode based on the remaining balance information is displayed by the display means. Further, when it is determined by the value determining means that the remaining balance information is equal to or less than a predetermined set value, a display mode based on the remaining balance information is displayed on the display means in a normal display mode. Further, when it is determined that the remaining balance information is larger than a predetermined set value, a display mode based on the remaining balance information is displayed on the display unit in a special display mode different from the normal display mode. As a result, when the remaining balance is larger than the set value, the display is displayed in a display mode different from the normal time, so that it is possible to make the player strongly recognize that the remaining balance is large. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting the return process and the release process in a state where a lot of remaining balance remains and causing the player to make a great loss.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, on the basis of the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the determination unit for determining whether or not it is correct, and the identification information for notifying the player of the determination result of the success / failure determination unit. Display control means to be displayed on the display means, and when the identification information indicating that the determination result is a win is displayed on the display means by the display control means, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player And when the bonus game executing means determines that the bonus game is to be executed, the informing means stores the storage medium of the external device based on the start of the bonus game. A return notification mode for notifying the player to perform an operation for executing a return process to be returned or a release process for canceling the valuable value information of the read storage medium is notified. Gaming machine C4, characterized in that the at it.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines C1 to 3, the following effects are achieved. Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the determination is performed by the determination unit. Identification information for notifying the player of the determination result is displayed on the display means by the display control means. When the identification information indicating that the determination result is a win is displayed on the display unit by the display control unit, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution unit. When it is determined that the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, a return process for returning the storage medium of the external device based on the start of the privilege game or the read storage medium A notifying means is notified of a return notification mode for notifying the player to perform an operation for executing a release process for canceling the valuable value information. Thereby, since it is possible to notify the player to execute the return process or the release process based on the start of the privilege game, while the player is executing the privilege game, The problem of forgetting that the valuable value information of the storage medium is being read can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the storage medium is stolen or valuable value information is misused.

  Game media according to a lending request signal for reading the valuable information stored in the storage medium by an external device provided outside the gaming machine and requesting the gaming machine to lend gaming media corresponding to the read valuable information Payout means for paying out, and external receiving means for receiving a predetermined external control signal output to the gaming machine when the external device has read the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, In the gaming machine having the above, a state in which the external device reads the valuable value information of the storage medium based on the external signal extraction means for extracting the external control signal and the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extraction means An external determination means for determining whether the external device is an operation means having an operation section operable by the player, and the operation means is operated, An operation signal output means for outputting a return signal to the external device for executing a return process for returning the inserted storage medium to the player or a release process for releasing the reading of the valuable information of the storage medium; A game is provided on the condition that the operation determination means for determining whether or not the operation means has been operated and the external determination means determine that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. A notification means for notifying a user to operate the operation means, and when the operation notification mode is notified by the notification means, the operation determination means is operated by the operation determination means. Based on the determination, the notification means includes notification switching means for switching to a specific notification mode different from the operation notification mode. Game machine D1 which is characterized in.

  According to the gaming machine D1, rental of gaming media that is output to a gaming machine based on the read valuable information by reading the valuable information stored in the storage medium by an external device provided outside the gaming machine The game medium is paid out by the payout means in accordance with a lending request signal for requesting. When the external device is in a state of reading valuable value information stored in the storage medium, a predetermined external control signal output to the gaming machine is received by the external receiving means. The external control signal is extracted by the external signal extraction means. Based on the extracted extracted external signal, the external determining means determines whether the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. Also, a return process for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player based on the operation means having an operation unit that can be operated by the player, or reading of valuable information of the storage medium A return signal for executing a canceling process for canceling is output to the external device by the operation signal output means. Further, it is determined by the operation determination means whether or not the operation means has been operated. An operation notifying mode for notifying the player to operate the operating means is notified by the notifying means on the condition that the external determining means has determined that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. Is done. When the operation notification mode is notified by the notification unit, the notification switching unit switches to a specific notification mode different from the operation notification mode based on the determination that the operation unit is operated by the operation determination unit. It is switched by. Thus, when the player operates the operation means, a specific notification mode is notified, so that the player can easily determine that the operation means has been normally operated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the user from forgetting to confirm whether the external device has normally executed the return process or the release process by the specific notification mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the damage to the player due to theft of the storage medium and the misuse of valuable value information.

  In the gaming machine D1, the game machine D1 has return signal extraction means for extracting a return signal output based on the operation of the operation unit, and the operation determination means is the extracted return signal extracted by the return signal extraction means Based on the above, the game machine D2 is characterized in that it is determined whether or not the operation means has been operated by a player.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a return signal output based on the operation of the operation unit is extracted by the return signal extraction unit. Based on the extracted return signal, the operation determining means determines whether the operating means has been operated by the player. Thereby, it can be recognized correctly whether the player operated the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player in a specific notification mode based on the timing when the operation means is operated. Therefore, it can be confirmed that the player has operated the operation means, and the processing of the external device can be confirmed without forgetting.

  In the gaming machine D1 or the gaming machine D2, the gaming machine D1 or the gaming machine D2 has valuable display means for displaying balance information indicated by valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device based on an external control signal received by the receiving means, The external determining means is configured to be able to determine balance information based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external extracting means, and the operation determining means is configured to allow the balance information to pass through a predetermined minimum balance by the external determining means. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that, when it is determined that the operation means has run out, it is determined that the operation means has been operated.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or the gaming machine D2, the following effects are produced. That is, the balance information indicated by the valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device is displayed on the valuable display means based on the external control signal received by the receiving means. Based on the extracted external signal, the balance information is discriminated by the external discriminating means. When it is determined by the external determination means that the balance information has gone without passing through the predetermined minimum balance, the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated. Accordingly, it is possible to determine that the operation means has been operated by the player without detecting the operation of the operation means. Therefore, the gaming machine can be configured with a simpler configuration.

  In any of the gaming machine D1 to the gaming machine D3, on the basis of the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the determination unit for determining whether or not the game is correct and the identification information that can identify the determination result of the success / failure determination unit. Display control means to be displayed on display means which is one of the means, and dynamic display mode determination for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed by the display control means based on the result of the judgment Means, and when the identification information indicating the winning is displayed on the display means, the bonus game executing means for executing the bonus game advantageous to the player, and the dynamic display mode determining means, And the player determines to operate the operation means based on the fact that the external determination means has determined that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. A return dynamic display mode that is a dynamic display mode including an operation notification mode to be notified is determined, and the notification switching unit is configured to perform the operation by the operation determination unit when the operation notification mode is displayed. Based on the determination that the means has been operated, the gaming machine D4 is switched to a display mode for informing the identification information indicating the winning.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is executed by the success / failure determination means. Identification information that can identify the determination result is displayed by the display control means on the display means that is one of the notification means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed by the display control unit is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the determination result. When the identification information indicating the winning is displayed on the display means, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. An operation for notifying the player to operate the operation means based on the determination result that the determination is successful and the external determination means determining that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. A return dynamic display mode that is a dynamic display mode including a notification mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. When the operation notification mode is displayed, the notification switching unit switches to the display mode for notifying the identification information indicating the win based on the determination that the operation unit is operated by the operation determination unit. Accordingly, since the identification information indicating the winning is displayed when the dynamic display mode of the identification information is operated on the operation means, it is possible to give the player enjoyment of operating the operation means. Accordingly, the player can cause the player to play the game with the expectation that the return dynamic display mode is determined, so that the player can be prevented from forgetting to operate the operation means. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the damage caused by theft of the storage medium and misuse of valuable value information.

  In any of the gaming machine D1 to the gaming machine D3, on the basis of the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the determination unit for determining whether or not the game is correct and the identification information that can identify the determination result of the success / failure determination unit. Display control means to be displayed on display means as one of means, privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when identification information indicating winning is displayed on the display means, and the determination of success / failure When the condition is satisfied, until the start condition for displaying the identification information of the correct / incorrect determination corresponding to the satisfied / inappropriate determination condition is satisfied, the correct / incorrect determination storage means for storing the acquired correct / incorrect determination condition, and the correct / incorrect Pre-failure determination means for determining the success / failure determination result corresponding to the success / failure determination condition stored in the determination storage means before the start condition is satisfied, and the notification means When the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated when it is determined by the part determination means that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium, A gaming machine D5 characterized in that it notifies the player of the result of determination by the means.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is executed by the success / failure determination means. Identification information that can identify the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed on the display unit, which is one of the notification units, by the display control unit. When the identification information indicating the winning is displayed on the display means, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. When the determination condition is satisfied, the determination condition storage means stores the determination condition until the start condition for displaying the identification information of the determination corresponding to the determination condition is satisfied. . The prior determination result corresponding to the stored determination result is determined by the prior determination unit before the start condition is satisfied. When it is determined by the external determination means that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium, the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated, and the advance determination means The determination result is notified to the player by the notification means. Thereby, a privilege can be given to a player by operating an operation means, and the opportunity for a player to operate an operation means can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the situation where the player forgets to operate the operating means and suffers from theft of the storage medium or the abuse of the valuable value information.

  According to a lending request signal for requesting a gaming machine to lend a gaming medium to be output corresponding to the value information read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine and reading the valuable information stored in the storage medium Payout means for paying out game media, and external reception means for receiving a predetermined external control signal output to the gaming machine when the external device is in a state of reading valuable value information stored in the storage medium And external signal reading means for extracting the external control signal, and the external device reads valuable value information of the storage medium based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extraction means. The external determination means for determining whether the player is in the state, an operation means having an operation section operable by the player, and the operation means being operated, An operation signal output means for outputting to the external device a return signal for executing a return process for returning the storage medium read by the apparatus to the player or a release process for releasing the reading of the valuable information of the storage medium; A valid state in which the return signal is output by the operation signal output unit based on an operation of the operation unit, and a prohibited state in which the return signal is prohibited from being output by the operation signal output unit. And a switching control means for switching when a predetermined condition is established as a trigger.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable information stored in the storage medium, and requests the gaming machine to lend gaming media to be output corresponding to the read valuable information. The game medium is paid out by the paying-out means in accordance with the lending request signal. When the external device is in a state of reading valuable value information stored in the storage medium, a predetermined external control signal output to the gaming machine is received by the external receiving means. The external control signal is extracted by the external signal extraction means. Based on the extracted extracted external signal, the external determining means determines whether the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. Based on the operation of the operation unit having an operation unit that can be operated by the player, the return processing for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player or the reading of the valuable information on the storage medium is canceled. A return signal for executing the release processing is output to the external device by the operation signal output means. Based on the operation of the operation means, a predetermined condition is established between a valid state in which a return signal is output by the operation signal output means and a prohibited state in which a return signal is prohibited from being output by the operation signal output means. It is switched by the switching control means when it is established. As a result, even if the player forgets to execute the return process or the release process by switching to a prohibited state where a return signal is not output even if the operation means is operated, the player may suffer from theft. Can be prevented. Therefore, it can concentrate on a game in comfort.

  In the gaming machine E1, based on the operation of the player, the gaming machine E1 includes input means capable of inputting an identification symbol, and identification information storage means for storing identification information input by the input means, and the switching control means Is the state in which the identification information is stored in the identification information storage means in a state where the external determination means satisfying the predetermined condition is determined to be in a state where the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. On the basis of the stored information, the effective state is switched to the prohibited state, while in the prohibited state, the same identification information as the identification information stored in the identification information storage unit is input by the input unit. Based on this, the gaming machine E2 is switched from the prohibited state to the valid state.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are produced. That is, the identification symbol is input by the input means based on the player's operation. The input identification information is stored in the identification information storage means. Based on the fact that the identification information is stored in the identification information storage means in a state in which it is determined that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium by the external determination means that satisfies the predetermined condition. The switching control means switches from the valid state to the prohibited state. On the other hand, when the same identification information as the identification information stored in the identification information storage means is input by the input means in the prohibited state, the switching control means switches from the prohibited state to the valid state. Accordingly, it is possible to easily switch between the valid state and the prohibited state by inputting the identification information. Therefore, damage caused by theft of the storage medium can be prevented by an easy operation. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, when the switching control unit switches from the valid state to the prohibited state, a timing unit that measures the switching execution time, and the timing unit is equal to or greater than a predetermined set value. And a forcible release means for forcibly switching to an effective state when the game machine E3 is reached.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effects are produced. That is, the switching execution time is measured by the time measuring means when the switching control means switches from the valid state to the prohibited state. When the time measuring means becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined set value, the forced release means forcibly switches to the valid state. As a result, the prohibition state can be automatically canceled at a preset time. Therefore, even if illegally set to the prohibited state, it is automatically switched to the valid state, so that the gaming machine can be returned to the normal state.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a prohibition notification mode indicating that the prohibition state is set when the switching control unit is switched from the valid state to the prohibition state based on a predetermined trigger. A gaming machine E4 having a notification means for notification.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the switching control means is switched from the valid state to the prohibited state, the notification means notifies the prohibition notification mode indicating that the prohibition state is set based on a predetermined trigger. Thereby, it can discriminate | determine that it has switched to the prohibition state easily by the prohibition alerting | reporting aspect. Therefore, if the game store is illegally switched to the prohibited state and left unattended, the amusement store side can notice the abnormality at an early stage. Therefore, the gaming machine can always be maintained in a normal state.

  According to a lending request signal for requesting a gaming machine to lend a gaming medium to be output corresponding to the value information read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine and reading the valuable information stored in the storage medium Payout means for paying out game media, and external reception means for receiving a predetermined external control signal output to the gaming machine when the external device is in a state of reading valuable value information stored in the storage medium And external signal reading means for extracting the external control signal, and the external device reads valuable value information of the storage medium based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extraction means. An external discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the player is in a state of being present, a player detecting means for detecting a player, and the external discriminating means for allowing the external device to store the valuable information of the storage medium When the player detection means has not detected a player in a state where it is determined that the player is reading, the player is in a state where the external device is reading valuable information on the storage medium. A gaming machine F1 comprising: a notification unit that notifies a notification mode indicating that there is a game.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable information stored in the storage medium, and requests the gaming machine to rent gaming media to be output in accordance with the read valuable information. The game medium is paid out by the paying-out means in accordance with the lending request signal. When the external device is in a state of reading valuable value information stored in the storage medium, a predetermined external control signal output to the gaming machine is received by the external receiving means. The external control signal is extracted by the external signal extraction means. Based on the extracted extracted external signal, the external determining means determines whether the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. Based on the operation of the operation unit having an operation unit that can be operated by the player, the return processing for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player or the reading of the valuable information on the storage medium is canceled. A return signal for executing the release processing is output to the external device by the operation signal output means. Based on the operation of the operation means, a predetermined condition is established between a valid state in which a return signal is output by the operation signal output means and a prohibited state in which a return signal is prohibited from being output by the operation signal output means. It is switched by the switching control means when it is established. As a result, even if the player forgets to execute the return process or the release process by switching to a prohibited state where a return signal is not output even if the operation means is operated, the player may suffer from theft. Can be prevented. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to concentrate on the game with peace of mind.

  Game media according to a lending request signal for reading the valuable information stored in the storage medium by an external device provided outside the gaming machine and requesting the gaming machine to lend gaming media corresponding to the read valuable information Payout means for paying out, and external receiving means for receiving a predetermined external control signal output to the gaming machine when the external device has read the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, In the gaming machine having the above, a state in which the external device reads the valuable value information of the storage medium based on the external signal extraction means for extracting the external control signal and the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extraction means An external discriminating means for discriminating whether the game is being performed, a game execution discriminating means for discriminating a period during which the player is playing a game, and a predetermined period of time In addition, when it is determined that the game is not being performed, the external determination unit determines that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. A gaming machine F2 comprising: a notification unit that notifies a notification mode indicating that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, the identification symbol is input by the input means based on the operation of the player. The input identification information is stored in the identification information storage means. Based on the fact that the identification information is stored in the identification information storage means in a state in which it is determined that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium by the external determination means that satisfies the predetermined condition. The switching control means switches from the valid state to the prohibited state. On the other hand, when the same identification information as the identification information stored in the identification information storage means is input by the input means in the prohibited state, the switching control means switches from the prohibited state to the valid state. Accordingly, it is possible to easily switch between the valid state and the prohibited state by inputting the identification information. Therefore, damage caused by theft of the storage medium can be prevented by an easy operation. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  Game media according to a lending request signal for reading the valuable information stored in the storage medium by an external device provided outside the gaming machine and requesting the gaming machine to lend gaming media corresponding to the read valuable information Payout means for paying out the game, storage means for storing the game balls paid out to the player by the payout means, and discharge means for discharging the game balls stored in the storage means to the outside of the gaming machine by the player's operation And an external receiving means for receiving a predetermined external control signal to be output to the gaming machine when the external device is in a state of reading the valuable value information stored in the storage medium. A storage determining means for determining whether or not a game ball is stored in the storage means, a discharge operation determining means for determining whether or not the game ball is discharged by the discharge means, and the external control. External signal extraction means for extracting a signal, and external determination means for determining whether the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extraction means And when it is determined that the discharge operation has been executed by the discharge operation determination unit and the storage determination unit determines that the game ball is not stored, the external determination unit determines that the external device has the valuable value of the storage medium. And a notification means for notifying a player of a notification mode indicating that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium when it is determined that the information is being read. A gaming machine F3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine F3, the switching execution time is measured by the timing unit when the switching control unit switches from the valid state to the prohibited state. When the time measuring means becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined set value, the forced release means forcibly switches to the valid state. As a result, the prohibition state can be automatically canceled at a preset time. Therefore, even if the prohibition state is illegally set, it is automatically switched to the valid state, so that the gaming machine can be returned to the normal state.

In the gaming machine F1 to the gaming machine F3, an operating means having an operating unit that can be operated by a player;
A return signal for executing a return process for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player or a release process for canceling the reading of the valuable information of the storage medium based on the operation of the operating means. Operation signal output means for outputting to the external device,
Switching control means for switching between a valid state in which the return signal is output by the operation signal output means and a prohibited state in which the return signal is prohibited from being output by the operation signal output means based on the establishment of a setting condition A gaming machine F4, characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the switching control means is switched from the valid state to the prohibited state, the notification means notifies the prohibition notification mode indicating that the prohibition state is set based on a predetermined trigger. Thereby, it can discriminate | determine that it has switched to the prohibition state easily by the prohibition alerting | reporting aspect. Therefore, if the game store is illegally switched to the prohibited state and left unattended, the amusement store side can notice the abnormality at an early stage. Therefore, the gaming machine can always be maintained in a normal state.

  Game media according to a lending request signal for reading the valuable information stored in the storage medium by an external device provided outside the gaming machine and requesting the gaming machine to lend gaming media corresponding to the read valuable information In a gaming machine having payout means for paying out money, and valuable display means in which information based on the valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device is displayed and controlled by the external device, it is displayed on the valuable display means. Image information detecting means for detecting image information to be detected, information determining means for determining valuable information of the storage medium displayed on the valuable display means from image information detected by the image information detecting means, and information determining means A game machine G1 having a notification means for notifying a player of a notification mode related to valuable value information determined by the player.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable information stored in the storage medium, and requests the gaming machine to lend gaming media in accordance with the read valuable information. In accordance with the lending request signal, the game medium is paid out by the payout means. Information based on the valuable information of the storage medium read into the external device is displayed on the valuable display means that is display-controlled by the external device. Image information displayed on the value display means is detected by the image information detection means. Based on the image information detected by the image information detecting means, the valuable information of the storage medium displayed on the valuable display means is determined by the information determining means. The notifying mode regarding the determined valuable information is notified to the player by the notifying means. Thereby, not only the value display means but also information relating to the value information of the storage medium read by the external device can be confirmed in the notification mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player forgets that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. Therefore, damage to the player due to theft of the storage medium or misuse of valuable value information can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine G1, the image information detecting means detects a light amount of image information displayed on the valuable display means, and the information determining means is based on the light amount detected by the image information detecting means. A gaming machine G2 characterized by discriminating valuable value information corresponding to the light quantity.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are produced. That is, the light quantity of the image information displayed on the valuable display means is detected by the image information detection means. Based on the amount of light detected by the image information detecting means, valuable information corresponding to the amount of light is determined by the information determining means. As a result, it is possible to determine information related to the valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device in synchronization with the information displayed on the valuable display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can accurately identify the information related to the valuable value information.

  In the gaming machine G1, the image information detection means performs an image process of taking an image displayed on the valuable display means, converting it into a numerical value, and converting the information determination means by the image processing. The gaming machine G3 according to claim 1, characterized in that valuable value information corresponding to the set numerical value is discriminated.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the image information detecting means executes image processing for taking an image displayed on the valuable display means and converting it into a numerical value. Valuable value information corresponding to the numerical value converted by the image processing is discriminated by the information discriminating means. As a result, it is possible to determine information related to the valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device in synchronization with the information displayed on the valuable display means. Therefore, the player can accurately identify information related to the valuable value information.

  According to a lending request signal for requesting a gaming machine to lend a gaming medium to be output corresponding to the value information read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine and reading the valuable information stored in the storage medium In a gaming machine having a payout means for paying out game media, an operation means having an operation unit operable by a player, and a storage medium read by the external device based on the operation of the operation means An operation signal output means for outputting a return signal to the external device for executing a return process for returning to the player or a release process for releasing the valuable information of the storage medium, and an operation section of the operation means. To allow a player to operate a permitted state and a prohibition state that is more difficult for the player to operate than the permitted state, and to establish a predetermined change condition Zui, the gaming machine and wherein the switching control means for switching the regulating means to either of said disabled state and the enabled state, and has a H1.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable information stored in the storage medium, and requests the gaming machine to lend gaming media in accordance with the read valuable information. In accordance with the lending request signal, the game medium is paid out by the payout means. Return processing for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player based on the operation means having an operation unit that can be operated by the player, or the valuable value information of the storage medium is released. A return signal for executing the release processing is output from the operation signal output means to the external device. The restricting means is set to a permitted state in which the player can operate the operation portion of the operating means and a prohibited state in which it is more difficult for the player to operate than the permitted state. Based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition, the switching means is switched to either the permitted state or the prohibited state by the switching control means. As a result, it is difficult to operate the operation unit by setting the prohibited state, so that even if the player forgets the return process or the release process, the storage medium is stolen or valuable information The damage of misuse can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine H1, the restriction means moves the restriction member that can be disposed on the front side of the operation unit, and the restriction member to a position on the front side of the operation unit and a position other than the front side of the operation unit. The switching control means switches to the prohibited state by fixing the restricting member at the front side position, and releases the fixed state to the permitted state. A gaming machine H2 that is to be switched.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the restricting member that can be arranged on the front side of the operation unit, and the restricting member are moved by the movable means to a position on the front side of the operation unit and a position other than the front side of the operation unit. By fixing the restricting member at the front surface side position, the switching control means switches to the prohibited state. On the other hand, by releasing the fixation, the switching control means switches to the permitted state. Thereby, in the prohibited state, it becomes difficult to operate the operation unit with the restricting member, and it can be easily determined that the player is set in the prohibited state. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with peace of mind after confirming that it has been switched to the prohibited state.

  In the gaming machine H1 or the gaming machine H2, the switching control includes input means capable of inputting identification information by a player's operation, and identification information storage means capable of storing the identification information input by the input means. In the permitted state, the means switches from the permitted state to the prohibited state based on the establishment of a change condition that the identification information input by the input means is newly stored in the identification information storage means. On the other hand, if it is in the prohibited state, it is assumed that the same identification information as the identification information stored in the identification information storage means is input by the input means, and that the change condition is satisfied and the permission is changed from the prohibited state to the permission state. A gaming machine H3 that is switched to a state.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or the gaming machine H2, the following effects are produced. That is, the identification information is input by the input means by the player's operation. The input identification information is stored in the identification information storage means. If it is in the permitted state, the switching control means switches from the permitted state to the prohibited state, assuming that the identification information input by the input means is newly stored in the identification information storage means, and that the change condition is satisfied. On the other hand, when it is in the prohibited state, the switching control means from the prohibited state to the permitted state is established as the change condition is satisfied that the same identification information as the identification information stored in the identification information storage means is input by the input means. It is switched by. Accordingly, it is possible to switch between the prohibited state and the permitted state by inputting the identification information, and it is possible to switch between the prohibited state and the permitted state according to the convenience of the player. Therefore, it is possible to play a game efficiently and safely.

  An external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable information stored in the storage medium, and requests the gaming machine to lend gaming media output to the gaming machine in accordance with the read valuable information. In a gaming machine having a payout means for paying out game media in accordance with a lending request signal, external signal receiving means for receiving an external signal output to the gaming machine based on valuable value information of a storage medium read by the external device; Whether the game is being executed using the valuable information determining means for determining the valuable information based on the information extracted from the external signal output to the external signal receiving means and the game medium. A game execution determining means for determining a game period, and a period during which the game execution determining means determines that a game is being executed using the game medium for a predetermined period of time. By determining whether the valuable value information determined by the valuable value information determining means has changed by a predetermined value or more, a rented game that is a game using the game medium paid out by the paying means according to the lending request signal is obtained. Lending game determining means for determining whether or not the game machine is being executed.

  According to the gaming machine I1, an external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable information stored in the storage medium, and outputs the gaming medium output to the gaming machine in accordance with the read valuable information. The game medium is paid out by the payout means in accordance with a lending request signal for requesting the gaming machine to lend. An external signal output to the gaming machine based on the valuable value information of the storage medium read by the external device is received by the external signal receiving means. Based on the information extracted from the external signal output to the external signal receiving means, the valuable information is determined by the valuable information determining means. Whether or not a game is being executed using the game medium is determined by the game execution determining means. The valuable value information determined by the valuable value information determining means changes by a predetermined value or more during a period when it is determined that the game is being executed using the game medium for a predetermined period by the game execution determining means. The lending game determining means determines whether or not a lending game, which is a game using the game medium paid out by the paying means according to the lending request signal, is being executed. Thereby, it is possible to determine with the gaming machine whether the rented game is being played or whether a game different from the rented game is being played.

  Based on the external signal, the valuable value display means for displaying the valuable value information indicated by the external signal, and the external signal extraction means for extracting the external signal for displaying the valuable value display means, the valuable value information The discriminating means discriminates the valuable information displayed on the valuable display means based on the external extraction signal extracted by the external signal extracting means, and when predetermined valuable information is displayed, In the case where it is determined by the valuable value information determining means, the lending game determining means has notifying means for executing a predetermined notification based on the determination that a game different from the rented game is being executed. The gaming machine I2 according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is I2.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the external signal, the valuable value information indicated by the external signal is displayed by the valuable display means. An external signal for displaying the valuable display means is extracted by the external signal extraction means. Based on the external extraction signal extracted by the external signal extraction means, the valuable information displayed on the valuable display means is determined by the valuable information determination means. When the valuable value information determining means determines that the predetermined valuable value information is displayed, a predetermined notification is made based on the fact that the rental game determining means determines that a game different from the rented game is being executed. Is executed by the notification means. As a result, when a rented game is not being performed, a predetermined notification is executed if the storage medium is being read into the external device, so that the player can store the valuable information on the storage medium in the external device. You can notice that it is being read. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the situation where the player leaves the seat while the storage medium is being read in the external device, and the storage medium is stolen or the valuable value information is misused.

  On the basis of the establishment of the gaming machine I1 or I2 success / failure determination condition, a validity determination execution unit that executes a determination of success / failure, a display unit that displays identification information indicating a result of the determination of validity / invalidity of the failure determination execution unit, and a display on the display unit A dynamic display mode determination unit that determines a dynamic display mode of the identification information, and a reduction in the balance indicated by the valuable value information determined by the valuable information determination unit. Investment amount storage means for storing, wherein the dynamic display mode determination means determines one dynamic display mode from among the plurality of dynamic display modes based on the value of the investment amount storage means The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine I1 or I2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. That is, based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the determination of success / failure is executed by the success / failure determination execution means. The display unit displays identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination unit. The dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed on the display unit is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit. Based on the decrease in the balance indicated by the valuable value information determined by the valuable information determining means, the total amount of the decrease is stored in the investment amount storage means. Based on the value of the investment amount storage means, one dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit from among the plurality of dynamic display modes. Thereby, the type of the dynamic display mode determined based on the investment amount of the player can be changed, and a different dynamic display mode can be displayed to the player who has played the game for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D5, E1 to E4, F1 to F4, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine Z1 characterized by being. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D5, E1 to E4, F1 to F4, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I3, the gaming machine is a slot machine A gaming machine Z2 characterized by that. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

In the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D5, E1 to E4, F1 to F4, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine Z3, which is a fusion of a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
A conventional gaming machine has a lending unit (card reading unit) for lending a gaming medium to a gaming machine using a medium such as a card or a coin in order to lend gaming media such as a gaming ball. Have been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-221336).
However, in such a gaming machine, the gaming machine only performs control for paying out the game medium in response to a command from the lending unit (card reading unit), and the gaming machine does not control the lending unit. Therefore, as a gaming machine, it was not possible to determine whether a card, a coin, or the like was inserted in the lending unit. For this reason, in such a gaming machine, it is impossible to control the player to forget to remove a card or coin, and the player forgets to remove the card or coin, resulting in theft or loss. there were.
This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and the player forgets to return the card or coin to the rental unit (card reading unit) for the game medium. It aims at providing the gaming machine which reduces a player's disadvantage.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is a game medium in which valuable information stored in the storage medium is read by an external device provided outside the gaming machine and corresponding to the read valuable information. A payout means for paying out the game medium in accordance with a loan request signal for requesting the game machine to lend, and when the external device has read the valuable value information stored in the storage medium, External reception means for receiving a predetermined external control signal to be output, and based on the external signal extraction means for extracting the external control signal and the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extraction means, External discrimination means for discriminating whether or not the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium, operation means having an operation unit operable by the player, and the operation means are operated. Based on the above, a return signal for executing a return process for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player or a release process for releasing the reading of the valuable information of the storage medium is sent to the external device. The operation signal output means for outputting, the operation determination means for determining whether or not the operation means has been operated, and the external determination means determine that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. A notification means for notifying the player of the operation means to operate the operation means, and the operation determination means when the notification means is informed by the notification means. Based on the determination that the operation means has been operated by the notification, the notification means switches the notification means to a specific notification mode different from the operation notification mode. A replacement unit, and has a.
The gaming machine of technical idea 2 is a gaming machine according to technical idea 1, comprising return signal extraction means for extracting a return signal output when the operation unit is operated, and the operation determining means Determines whether the operating means has been operated by the player based on the extracted return signal extracted by the return signal extracting means.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is the gaming machine of technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the balance information indicated by the valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device is used as an external control signal received by the receiving means. Based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external extraction unit, the external determination unit is configured to be able to determine balance information, and the operation determination unit is configured to include the external determination unit. When it is determined by the means that the balance information has gone without passing through the predetermined minimum balance, it is determined that the operation means has been operated.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein a validity determination unit that executes a determination as to whether or not the game is successful based on the establishment of a validity determination condition; Display control means for displaying identification information that can identify the result of the determination on the display means, which is one of the notification means, and a dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed by the display control means. Dynamic display mode determining means for determining based on the determination result, bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when identification information indicating winning is displayed on the display means, and the dynamic The display mode determining means is based on the fact that the result of the determination is correct and the external determination means determines that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. A return dynamic display mode that is a dynamic display mode including an operation notification mode for notifying the player to operate the operation unit is determined, and the notification switching unit displays the operation notification mode. In this case, based on the fact that the operation means is determined to be operated by the operation determination means, the display mode is switched to display the identification information indicating the hit.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein a validity determination means for performing a validity determination of a game based on the establishment of a validity determination condition, and the validity determination means When the display control means for displaying the identification information that can identify the result of the determination on the display means, which is one of the notification means, and the identification information indicating the win on the display means, a privilege advantageous to the player Bonus game execution means for executing a game, and when the above-described success / failure determination condition is satisfied, until the start condition for displaying the identification information of the determination / non-acceptance corresponding to the established determination result is satisfied. Precise / failure determination storage means for storing determination conditions, and prior failure determination means for determining the determination result corresponding to the validity determination conditions stored in the validity determination storage means before the start condition is satisfied. And the notification means determines that the operation determination means has been operated by the operation determination means when the external determination means determines that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. When it is determined, the player is notified of the determination result of the prior hit determination unit.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the external device provided outside the gaming machine reads the valuable information stored in the storage medium, and outputs the valuable information to the gaming machine based on the read valuable information. The game medium is paid out by the payout means in accordance with a lending request signal for requesting lending of the game medium. When the external device is in a state of reading valuable value information stored in the storage medium, a predetermined external control signal output to the gaming machine is received by the external receiving means. The external control signal is extracted by the external signal extraction means. Based on the extracted extracted external signal, the external determining means determines whether the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium.
Also, a return process for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player based on the operation means having an operation unit that can be operated by the player, or reading of valuable information of the storage medium A return signal for executing a canceling process for canceling is output to the external device by the operation signal output means. Further, it is determined by the operation determination means whether or not the operation means has been operated.
An operation notifying mode for notifying the player to operate the operating means is notified by the notifying means on the condition that the external determining means has determined that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. Is done. When the operation notification mode is notified by the notification unit, the notification switching unit switches to a specific notification mode different from the operation notification mode based on the determination that the operation unit is operated by the operation determination unit. It is switched by.
Thus, when the player operates the operation means, a specific notification mode is notified, so that the player can easily determine that the operation means has been normally operated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the user from forgetting to confirm whether the external device has normally executed the return process or the release process by the specific notification mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the damage of the player due to theft of the storage medium and the valuable value information can be reduced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects can be obtained. That is, a return signal output based on the operation of the operation unit is extracted by the return signal extraction unit. Based on the extracted return signal, the operation determining means determines whether the operating means has been operated by the player.
Thereby, it can be recognized correctly whether the player operated the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player in a specific notification mode based on the timing when the operation means is operated. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be confirmed that the player has operated the operation means, and the processing of the external device can be confirmed without forgetting.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. That is, the balance information indicated by the valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device is displayed on the valuable display means based on the external control signal received by the receiving means. Based on the extracted external signal, the balance information is discriminated by the external discriminating means. When it is determined by the external determination means that the balance information has gone without passing through the predetermined minimum balance, the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated.
Accordingly, it is possible to determine that the operation means has been operated by the player without detecting the operation of the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the gaming machine can be configured with a simpler configuration.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is executed by the success / failure determination means. Identification information that can identify the determination result is displayed by the display control means on the display means that is one of the notification means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed by the display control unit is determined by the dynamic display mode determination unit based on the determination result. When the identification information indicating the winning is displayed on the display means, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means.
An operation for notifying the player to operate the operation means based on the determination result that the determination is successful and the external determination means determining that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium. A return dynamic display mode that is a dynamic display mode including a notification mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. When the operation notification mode is displayed, the notification switching unit switches to the display mode for notifying the identification information indicating the win based on the determination that the operation unit is operated by the operation determination unit.
Accordingly, since the identification information indicating the winning is displayed when the dynamic display mode of the identification information is operated on the operation means, it is possible to give the player enjoyment of operating the operation means. Accordingly, the player can cause the player to play the game with the expectation that the return dynamic display mode is determined, so that the player can be prevented from forgetting to operate the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the damage caused by theft of the storage medium or misuse of valuable value information.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination of the game is executed by the success / failure determination means. Identification information that can identify the result of the determination by the determination unit is displayed on the display unit, which is one of the notification units, by the display control unit. When the identification information indicating the winning is displayed on the display means, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. When the determination condition is satisfied, the determination condition storage means stores the determination condition until the start condition for displaying the identification information of the determination corresponding to the determination condition is satisfied. . The prior determination result corresponding to the stored determination result is determined by the prior determination unit before the start condition is satisfied.
When it is determined by the external determination means that the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium, the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated, and the advance determination means The determination result is notified to the player by the notification means.
Thereby, a privilege can be given to a player by operating an operation means, and the opportunity for a player to operate an operation means can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce that the player forgets to operate the operation means and suffers from theft of the storage medium or misuse of valuable value information.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
17 upper plate (first storage means)
17a upper plate sensor (storage discrimination means)
50 lower pan (second storage means)
52a discharge operation discriminating means 41 Balance indicator (external receiving means )
42 Return button (operation means, operation signal output means )
81 3rd symbol display device (notification means)
111 Dispensing control device (dispensing means )
LDa, LDb, LDc Phototransistor (external signal extraction means)
S108 external determination manual stage S1708 manipulation determination hand stage

Claims (5)

Game media according to a lending request signal for reading the valuable information stored in the storage medium by an external device provided outside the gaming machine and requesting the gaming machine to lend gaming media corresponding to the read valuable information A payout means for paying out
In a gaming machine having external receiving means for receiving a predetermined external control signal to be output to a gaming machine when the external device is in a state of reading valuable value information stored in the storage medium,
External signal extraction means for extracting the external control signal;
Based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external signal extracting means, external determining means for determining whether the external device is reading the valuable information of the storage medium;
Operation means having an operation unit operable by a player;
A return signal for executing a return process for returning the storage medium read by the external device to the player or a release process for canceling the reading of the valuable information of the storage medium based on the operation of the operating means. Operation signal output means for outputting to the external device,
Operation determining means for determining whether or not the operating means has been operated;
An operation notification mode for notifying the player to operate the operation means is provided on the condition that the external determination means determines that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. Notification means for
When the operation notification mode is notified by the notification unit, a specific notification different from the operation notification mode is provided to the notification unit based on the determination that the operation unit is operated by the operation determination unit. And a notification switching means for switching to a mode. A return signal extracting means for extracting a return signal output based on the operation of the operation unit;
2. The game according to claim 1, wherein the operation determination means determines whether the operation means has been operated by a player based on the extracted return signal extracted by the return signal extraction means. Machine. Valuable value display means for displaying balance information indicated by valuable value information of the storage medium read into the external device based on an external control signal received by the reception means;
The external determination means is configured to be able to determine balance information based on the extracted external signal extracted by the external extraction means,
The operation determining means determines that the operating means has been operated when it is determined by the external determining means that balance information has gone without passing through a predetermined minimum balance. The gaming machine according to 1 or 2. Based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination means for performing the determination of the success / failure of the game,
Display control means for displaying on the display means, which is one of the notification means, identification information that can identify the result of the determination of the validity determination means;
Dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information displayed by the display control unit based on the result of the determination of success / failure to the determination unit for success / failure;
When the identification information indicating the win is displayed on the display means, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player;
The dynamic display mode determination means is based on the fact that the result of the determination is correct and the external determination means determines that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. Determining a return dynamic display mode which is a dynamic display mode including an operation notification mode for notifying a player to operate the operation means;
The notification switching unit is configured to display the identification information indicating the hit based on the fact that the operation determination unit determines that the operation unit is operated when the operation notification mode is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the gaming machine is switched. Based on the establishment of the success / failure determination condition, the success / failure determination means for performing the determination of the success / failure of the game,
Display control means for displaying on the display means, which is one of the notification means, identification information that can identify the result of the determination of the validity determination means;
When the identification information indicating the win is displayed on the display means, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player;
A determination unit for storing the determination result determination condition until the start condition for displaying the identification information of the determination result corresponding to the satisfied determination condition is satisfied when the determination condition is satisfied; ,
A pre-failure determination unit that determines a determination result corresponding to the determination result stored in the determination unit before the start condition is satisfied,
The notification means is determined when the operation determination means determines that the operation means is operated when the external determination means determines that the external device is reading the valuable value information of the storage medium. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the player is notified of the determination result of the prior-winning determination unit.

Images